771592
112
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/120
Next page
• INSTALLATION MANUAL
• ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗΣ
• MANUAL DE INSTALARE
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
Table of Contents
Installation Manual
Indoor Unit Installation........ 11
1. Select installation location.......................... 11
2. Attach mounting plate to wall....................
12
3. Drill wall hole for connective piping............
12
4. Prepare refrigerant piping...........................
14
5. Connect drain hose....................................
15
6. Connect signal cable..................................
17
7. Wrap piping and cables..............................
18
8. Mount indoor unit.....................................
18
Outdoor Unit Installation...
20
8
1. Select installation location.................. 20
2. Install drain joint................................
21
3. Anchor outdoor unit..........................
22
4. Connect signal and power cables.......23
Safety Precautions........................... 4
0
1
5
Accessories........................................ 6
2
4
Unit Parts.......................................... 10
3
Installation Summary - Indoor Unit........
Table of Contents
Installation Manual
Indoor Unit Installation........ 11
1. Select installation location.......................... 11
2. Attach mounting plate to wall....................
12
3. Drill wall hole for connective piping............
12
4. Prepare refrigerant piping...........................
14
5. Connect drain hose....................................
15
6. Connect signal cable..................................
17
7. Wrap piping and cables..............................
18
8. Mount indoor unit.....................................
18
Outdoor Unit Installation...
20
8
1. Select installation location.................. 20
2. Install drain joint................................
21
3. Anchor outdoor unit..........................
22
4. Connect signal and power cables.......23
Safety Precautions........................... 4
0
1
5
Accessories........................................ 6
2
4
Unit Parts.......................................... 10
3
Installation Summary - Indoor Unit........
Refrigerant Piping Connection........ 25
A. Note on Pipe Length................................................ 25
B. Connection Instructions –Refrigerant Piping............. 25
1. Cut pipe..............................................................
25
2. Remove burrs......................................................
26
3. Flare pipe ends....................................................
26
4. Connect pipes.....................................................
27
Air Evacuation................... 29
1. Evacuation Instructions...................... 29
2. Note on Adding Refrigerant...............30
Electrical and Gas Leak Checks........ 31
Test Run............................................ 32
European Disposal Guidelines........ 34
6
7
8
9
10
Information servicing .................... 35
11
MC MC
C au t i o n: Risk of fire
(for R32/R290 refrigerant ony )
Page 4
Safety Precautions
This symbol indicates that ignoring instructions may cause death or serious
injury.
This symbol indicates that ignoring instructions may cause moderate injury
to your person, or damage to your unit or other property.
Read Safety Precautions Before Installation
Incorrect installation due to ignoring instructions can cause serious damage or injury.
The seriousness of potential damage or injuries is classied as either a WARNING or CAUTION.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Do notmodify the length of the power supply cord or use an extension cord to power the unit.
Do not
Do not
share the electrical outlet with other appliances. Improper or insufcient power supply
can cause re or electrical shock.
When connecting refrigerant piping, do not let substances or gases other than the specied
refrigerant enter the unit. The presence of other gases or substances will lower the unit’s capacity,
and can cause abnormally high pressure in the refrigeration cycle. This can cause explosion and injury.
allow children to play with the air conditioner. Children must be supervised around the
unit at all times.
1.
Installation must be performed by an authorized dealer or specialist. Defective installation can
cause water leakage, electrical shock, or re.
2.
Installation must be performed according to the installation instructions. Improper installation can
cause water leakage, electrical shock, or re. (In North America,installation must be performed in
accordance with the requirement of NEC and CEC by authorized personnel only.)
3.
Contact an authorized service technician for repair or maintenance of this unit.
4.
Only use the included accessories, parts, and specied parts for installation. Using non-standard
parts can cause water leakage, electrical shock, re, and can cause the unit to fail.
5.
Install the unit in a rm location that can support the unit’s weight. If the chosen location cannot
support the unit’s weight, or the installation is not done properly, the unit may drop and cause
serious injury and damage.
This symbol indicates that you must never perform the action indicated.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean, other than those
recommended by the manufacturer.
The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources
(for example: open ames,an operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater)
Do not pierce or burn.
Appliance shall be stored in a well -ventilated area where the room size corresponds to the
room area as speciec for operation.
Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an odour.
NOTE: Clause 7 to 10 are required for the units adopt R32/R290 Refrigerant.
Page 4
Safety Precautions
This symbol indicates that ignoring instructions may cause death or serious
injury.
This symbol indicates that ignoring instructions may cause moderate injury
to your person, or damage to your unit or other property.
Read Safety Precautions Before Installation
Incorrect installation due to ignoring instructions can cause serious damage or injury.
The seriousness of potential damage or injuries is classied as either a WARNING or CAUTION.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Do notmodify the length of the power supply cord or use an extension cord to power the unit.
Do not
Do not
share the electrical outlet with other appliances. Improper or insufcient power supply
can cause re or electrical shock.
When connecting refrigerant piping, do not let substances or gases other than the specied
refrigerant enter the unit. The presence of other gases or substances will lower the unit’s capacity,
and can cause abnormally high pressure in the refrigeration cycle. This can cause explosion and injury.
allow children to play with the air conditioner. Children must be supervised around the
unit at all times.
1.
Installation must be performed by an authorized dealer or specialist. Defective installation can
cause water leakage, electrical shock, or re.
2.
Installation must be performed according to the installation instructions. Improper installation can
cause water leakage, electrical shock, or re. (In North America,installation must be performed in
accordance with the requirement of NEC and CEC by authorized personnel only.)
3.
Contact an authorized service technician for repair or maintenance of this unit.
4.
Only use the included accessories, parts, and specied parts for installation. Using non-standard
parts can cause water leakage, electrical shock, re, and can cause the unit to fail.
5.
Install the unit in a rm location that can support the unit’s weight. If the chosen location cannot
support the unit’s weight, or the installation is not done properly, the unit may drop and cause
serious injury and damage.
This symbol indicates that you must never perform the action indicated.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean, other than those
recommended by the manufacturer.
The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources
(for example: open ames,an operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater)
Do not pierce or burn.
Appliance shall be stored in a well -ventilated area where the room size corresponds to the
room area as speciec for operation.
Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an odour.
NOTE: Clause 7 to 10 are required for the units adopt R32/R290 Refrigerant.
Page 5
WARNING
11.
For all electrical work, follow all local and national wiring standards, regulations, and the
Installation Manual. You must use an independent circuit and single outlet to supply power. Do
not connect other appliances to the same outlet. Insufcient electrical capacity or defects in
electrical work can cause electrical shock or re.
12.
For all electrical work, use the specied cables. Connect cables tightly, and clamp them securely to
prevent external forces from damaging the terminal. Improper electrical connections can overheat
and cause re, and may also cause shock.
13.
14.
15.
16.
All wiring must be properly arranged to ensure that the control board cover can close properly. If
the control board cover is not closed properly, it can lead to corrosion and cause the connection
points on the terminal to heat up, catch re, or cause electrical shock.
This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons with reduced
Physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and knowledge if they have been given
supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards
involved. Children shall not play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be
made by children without supervision.
CAUTION
For units that have an auxiliary electric heater, do not install the unit within 1 meter (3 feet) of
any combustible materials.
Do not
install the unit in a location that may be exposed to combustible gas leaks. If combustible
gas accumulates around the unit, it may cause re.
Do not operate your air conditioner in a wet room such as a bathroom or laundry room. Too
much exposure to water can cause electrical components to short circuit.
1.
The product must be properly grounded at the time of installation, or electrical shock may occur.
In certain functional environments, such as kitchens, server rooms, etc., the use of specially designed
air-conditioning units is highly recommended.
If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly
qualied persons in order to avoid a hazard.
Note about Fluorinated Gasses
1. This air-conditioning unit contains fluorinated gasses. For specic information on the type of gas
and the amount, please refer to the relevant label on the unit itself.
Compliance with national gas
regulations shall be observed.
2. Installation, service, maintenance and repair of this unit must be performed by a certied technician.
3. Product uninstallation and recycling must be performed by a certied technician.
4. If the system has a leak-detection system installed, it must be checked for leaks at least every 12 months.
When the unit is checked for leaks, proper record-keeping of all checks is strongly recommended.
2. Install drainage piping according to the instructions in this manual. Improper drainage may cause
water damage to your home and property.
3.
The appliance shall be stored so as to prevent mechanical damage from occurring.
4. Any person who is involve with working on or breaking into a refrigerant circuit should hold a
current valid certicate from an industry-accredited assessment authority, which authorizes
their competence to handle refrigerants safely in accordance with an industry recognized
assessment specication.
Name
Shape Quantity
1
1
1
(for cooling & heating
models only)
Clip anchor
Mounting plate xing
screw ST3.9 X 25
Remote controller
Fixing screw for remote
controller holder ST2.9 x 10
Remote controller holder
Dry battery AAA.LR03
Seal
Drain joint
Mounting plate
1
Accessories
The air conditioning system comes with the following accessories. Use all of the installation
parts and accessories to install the air conditioner. Improper installation may result in water
leakage, electrical shock and re, or cause the equipment to fail.
5
5
2
1
Optional
Parts
2
Page 6
USER’S MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
WARNING
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
Owner’s manual
Installation manual
Remote controller
illustration
Page 7
Name
Shape Quantity
Parts you must purc hase.
Consult the dealer about
the pipe size.
Connecting pipe
assembly
Liquid side
Gas side
Φ6.35( 1/4 i n)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ12.7(1/2in)
Φ 16( 5/8in)
Appliance shall be stored in a well -ventilated area where the room size corresponds to the
room area as speciec for operation.
For R32 frigerant models:
Appliance shall be installed, operated and stored in a room with a oor area larger than 4m .
Appliance shall not be installed in an unvertilated space, if that space is smaller than 4m .
For R290 refrigerant models, the minimum room size needed:
<=9000Btu/h units: 13m
>9000Btu/h and <=12000Btu/h units: 17m
>12000Btu/h and <=18000Btu/h units: 26m
>18000Btu/h and <=24000Btu/h units: 35m
Φ 19( 3/4in)
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
• USER’S MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
• MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
REMOTE CONTROLLER
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗΣ
MANUAL DE INSTALARE
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
Name
Shape Quantity
1
1
1
(for cooling & heating
models only)
Clip anchor
Mounting plate xing
screw ST3.9 X 25
Remote controller
Fixing screw for remote
controller holder ST2.9 x 10
Remote controller holder
Dry battery AAA.LR03
Seal
Drain joint
Mounting plate
1
Accessories
The air conditioning system comes with the following accessories. Use all of the installation
parts and accessories to install the air conditioner. Improper installation may result in water
leakage, electrical shock and re, or cause the equipment to fail.
5
5
2
1
Optional
Parts
2
Page 6
USER’S MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
WARNING
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
Owner’s manual
Installation manual
Remote controller
illustration
Page 7
Name
Shape Quantity
Parts you must purc hase.
Consult the dealer about
the pipe size.
Connecting pipe
assembly
Liquid side
Gas side
Φ6.35( 1/4 i n)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ12.7(1/2in)
Φ 16( 5/8in)
Appliance shall be stored in a well -ventilated area where the room size corresponds to the
room area as speciec for operation.
For R32 frigerant models:
Appliance shall be installed, operated and stored in a room with a oor area larger than 4m .
Appliance shall not be installed in an unvertilated space, if that space is smaller than 4m .
For R290 refrigerant models, the minimum room size needed:
<=9000Btu/h units: 13m
>9000Btu/h and <=12000Btu/h units: 17m
>12000Btu/h and <=18000Btu/h units: 26m
>18000Btu/h and <=24000Btu/h units: 35m
Φ 19( 3/4in)
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
• USER’S MANUAL
• ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
• MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
REMOTE CONTROLLER
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗΣ
MANUAL DE INSTALARE
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
Page 8
Installation Summary - Indoor Unit 2
Installation
Select Installation Location
(Page 11)
Attach Mounting Plate
(Page 12)
Drill Wall Hole
(Page 12)
Determine Wall Hole Position
(Page 12)
1 2
34
12cm
(4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm
(4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Page 8
Installation Summary - Indoor Unit 2
Installation
Select Installation Location
(Page 11)
Attach Mounting Plate
(Page 12)
Drill Wall Hole
(Page 12)
Determine Wall Hole Position
(Page 12)
1 2
34
12cm
(4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm
(4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Page 9
Mount Indoor Unit
(Page 18)
STEP 8
Wrap Piping and Cable
(not applicable for some locations in the US )
(Page 18)
Connect Piping
(Page 25) Connect Wiring
(Page 17)
Prepare Drain Hose
(Page 14)
567
8
9
Page 10
Unit Parts 3
NOTE ON ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustrations in this manual are for explanatory purposes. The actual shape of your indoor
unit may be slightly different. The actual shape shall prevail.
Fig. 3.1
NOTE: The installation must be performed in accordance with the requirement of local and
national standards. The installation may be slightly different in different areas.
Wall Mounting Plate
Power Cable (Some Units)
Refrigerant Piping
Signal Cable
Remote Controller
Drainage Pipe
Louver
Remote controller Holder
(Some Units)
Functional Filter (On Front of
Main Filter - Some Units)
Front Panel
Outdoor Unit Power Cable
(Some Units)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
Air-break switch
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
11
5
Page 10
Unit Parts 3
NOTE ON ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustrations in this manual are for explanatory purposes. The actual shape of your indoor
unit may be slightly different. The actual shape shall prevail.
Fig. 3.1
NOTE: The installation must be performed in accordance with the requirement of local and
national standards. The installation may be slightly different in different areas.
Wall Mounting Plate
Power Cable (Some Units)
Refrigerant Piping
Signal Cable
Remote Controller
Drainage Pipe
Louver
Remote controller Holder
(Some Units)
Functional Filter (On Front of
Main Filter - Some Units)
Front Panel
Outdoor Unit Power Cable
(Some Units)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
Air-break switch
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
11
5
Page 11
Indoor Unit Installation 4
Installation Instructions – Indoor
Unit
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Before installing the indoor unit, refer to the
label on the product box to make sure that the
model number of the indoor unit matches the
model number of the outdoor unit.
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the indoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Good air circulation
o
Convenient drainage
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb other
people
o
Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate
o
Strong enough to support the weight of the
unit
o
A location at least one meter from all other
electrical devices (e.g., TV, radio, computer)
DO NOT install unit in the following
locations:
Near any source of heat, steam, or
combustible gas
Near flammable items such as curtains or
clothing
Near any obstacle that might block air
circulation
Near the doorway
In a location subject to direct sunlight
NOTE ABOUT WALL HOLE:
If there is no xed refrigerant piping:
While choosing a location, be aware that you
should leave ample room for a wall hole (see
Drill wall hole for connective piping step)
for the signal cable and refrigerant piping
that connect the indoor and outdoor units.
The default position for all piping is the right
side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit).
However, the unit can accommodate piping to
both the left and right.
Fig. 3.1-a
Page 12
Refer to the following diagram to ensure proper distance from walls and ceiling:
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
or more
2.3m (90.55in) or more
12cm (4.75in)
or more
15cm (5.9in) or more
Step 2: Attach mounting plate to wall
The mounting plate is the device on which you
will mount the indoor unit.
1.
Remove the screw that attaches the mounting
plate to the back of the indoor unit.
2.
Place the mounting plate against the wall
in a location that meets the standards in
the Select Installation Location step. (See
Mounting Plate Dimensions for detailed
information on mounting plate sizes.)
3.
Drill holes for mounting screws in places that:
have studs and can support the weight of
the unit
correspond to screw holes in the mounting
plate
4.
Secure the mounting plate to the wall with
the screws provided.
5.
Make sure that mounting plate is at against
the wall.
NOTE FOR CONCRETE OR BRICK WALLS:
If the wall is made of brick, concrete, or similar
material, drill 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter)
holes in the wall and insert the sleeve anchors
provided. Then secure the mounting plate to
the wall by tightening the screws directly into
the clip anchors.
Step 3: Drill wall hole for connective piping
You must drill a hole in the wall for refrigerant
piping, the drainage pipe, and the signal cable
that will connect the indoor and outdoor units.
1.
Determine the location of the wall hole based
on the position of the mounting plate. Refer
to Mounting Plate Dimensions on the
next page to help you determine the optimal
position. The wall hole should have a 65mm
(2.5in) diameter at least, and at a slightly
lower angle to facilitate drainage.
2.
3.
Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This
protects the edges of the hole and will help
seal it when you nish the installation process.
CAUTION
When drilling the wall hole, make sure to
avoid wires, plumbing, and other sensitive
components.
Using a 65mm (2.5in) or 90mm(3.54in)
(depending on models )core drill, drill a
hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole
is drilled at
a slight downward angle, so
that the outdoor end of the hole is lower
than the indoor end by about 5mm to 7mm
(0.2-0.27in). This will ensure proper water
drainage. (See Fig. 3.2)
Page 12
Refer to the following diagram to ensure proper distance from walls and ceiling:
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
or more
2.3m (90.55in) or more
12cm (4.75in)
or more
15cm (5.9in) or more
Step 2: Attach mounting plate to wall
The mounting plate is the device on which you
will mount the indoor unit.
1.
Remove the screw that attaches the mounting
plate to the back of the indoor unit.
2.
Place the mounting plate against the wall
in a location that meets the standards in
the Select Installation Location step. (See
Mounting Plate Dimensions for detailed
information on mounting plate sizes.)
3.
Drill holes for mounting screws in places that:
have studs and can support the weight of
the unit
correspond to screw holes in the mounting
plate
4.
Secure the mounting plate to the wall with
the screws provided.
5.
Make sure that mounting plate is at against
the wall.
NOTE FOR CONCRETE OR BRICK WALLS:
If the wall is made of brick, concrete, or similar
material, drill 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter)
holes in the wall and insert the sleeve anchors
provided. Then secure the mounting plate to
the wall by tightening the screws directly into
the clip anchors.
Step 3: Drill wall hole for connective piping
You must drill a hole in the wall for refrigerant
piping, the drainage pipe, and the signal cable
that will connect the indoor and outdoor units.
1.
Determine the location of the wall hole based
on the position of the mounting plate. Refer
to Mounting Plate Dimensions on the
next page to help you determine the optimal
position. The wall hole should have a 65mm
(2.5in) diameter at least, and at a slightly
lower angle to facilitate drainage.
2.
3.
Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This
protects the edges of the hole and will help
seal it when you nish the installation process.
CAUTION
When drilling the wall hole, make sure to
avoid wires, plumbing, and other sensitive
components.
Using a 65mm (2.5in) or 90mm(3.54in)
(depending on models )core drill, drill a
hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole
is drilled at
a slight downward angle, so
that the outdoor end of the hole is lower
than the indoor end by about 5mm to 7mm
(0.2-0.27in). This will ensure proper water
drainage. (See Fig. 3.2)
Page 13
Wall
Indoor Outdoor
mm7-5
(0.2-0.27in)
Fig.3.2
MOUNTING PLATE DIMENSIONS
Different models have different mounting plates.
In order to ensure that you have ample room to
mount the indoor unit, the diagrams to the right
show different types of mounting plates along
with the following dimensions:
Width of mounting plate
Height of mounting plate
Width of indoor unit relative to plate
Height of indoor unit relative to plate
Recommended position of wall hole (both
to the left and right of mounting plate)
Relative distances between screw holes
Fig. 3.2
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
Model B
Model A
146.5mm(5.76in)
228.5mm(8.99in) 241mm(9.48in)
45mm(1.7in) 101.6mm(4in)
183.6mm(7.2in)
123.6mm(4.86in)
715mm(28in)
805mm(31.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
115.6mm(4.55in)
233.1mm(9.17in)
398mm(15.67in)
398mm(15.98in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
302mm (11.88in)
36.6mm
(1.44in)
36.7mm
(1.44in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47.5mm
(1.87in)
Model C
304.1mm(11.9in) 224.2mm(8.82in)
45mm(1.7in)
259.1mm(10.2in)
100.6mm(3.96in)123.7mm(4.87in)
958.3mm(37.7in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
324.9mm (12.79in)
55mm
(2.16in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47mm
(1.85in)
55mm
(2.16in)
Model D
316.7mm(12.4in)
1037.6mm(40.85in)
271.7mm(10.69in)
291mm(11.45in)
246mm(9.68in)
45mm(1.77in)
45mm(1.77in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
45mm(1.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
439mm(17.28in)
506mm(19.92in)
Correct orientation of Mounting Plate
Φ
NOTE: When the gas side connective pipe is
16mm(5/8in) or more, the wall hole should
be 90mm(3.54in).
Page 14
CAUTION
Be extremely careful not to dent or damage the piping while bending them away from the
unit. Any dents in the piping will affect the unit’s performance.
Step 4: Prepare refrigerant piping
The refrigerant piping is inside an insulating
sleeve attached to the back of the unit. You must
prepare the piping before passing it through the
hole in the wall. Refer to the Refrigerant Piping
Connection section of this manual for detailed
instructions on pipe aring and are torque
requirements, technique, etc.
1. Based on the position of the wall hole relative
to the mounting plate, choose the side from
which the piping will exit the unit.
2. If the wall hole is behind the unit, keep the
knock-out panel in place. If the wall hole is to
the side of the indoor unit, remove the plastic
knock-out panel from that side of the unit.
(See Fig. 3.3 ). This will create a slot through
which your piping can exit the unit. Use
needle nose pliers if the plastic panel is too
difcult to remove by hand.
3.
Use scissors to cut down the length of the
insulating sleeve to reveal about 15cm (6in)
of the refrigerant piping. This serves two
purposes:
To facilitate the Refrigerant Piping
Connection process
To facilitate Gas Leak Checks and enable
you to check for dents
4.
If existing connective piping is already
embedded in the wall, proceed directly to
the Connect Drain Hose step. If there is no
embedded piping, connect the indoor unit’s
refrigerant piping to the connective piping
that will join the indoor and outdoor units.
Refer to the Refrigerant Piping Connection
section of this manual for detailed instructions.
5.
Based on the position of the wall hole
relative to the mounting plate, determine the
necessary angle of your piping.
6.
Grip the refrigerant piping at the base of the
bend.
7.
Slowly, with even pressure, bend the piping
towards the hole. Do not dent or damage the
piping during the process.
NOTE ON PIPING ANGLE
Refrigerant piping can exit the indoor unit from
four different angles:
Left-hand side
Left rear
Right-hand side
Right rear
Refer to
Fig. 3.4 for details.
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Knock-out Panel
Page 14
CAUTION
Be extremely careful not to dent or damage the piping while bending them away from the
unit. Any dents in the piping will affect the unit’s performance.
Step 4: Prepare refrigerant piping
The refrigerant piping is inside an insulating
sleeve attached to the back of the unit. You must
prepare the piping before passing it through the
hole in the wall. Refer to the Refrigerant Piping
Connection section of this manual for detailed
instructions on pipe aring and are torque
requirements, technique, etc.
1. Based on the position of the wall hole relative
to the mounting plate, choose the side from
which the piping will exit the unit.
2. If the wall hole is behind the unit, keep the
knock-out panel in place. If the wall hole is to
the side of the indoor unit, remove the plastic
knock-out panel from that side of the unit.
(See Fig. 3.3 ). This will create a slot through
which your piping can exit the unit. Use
needle nose pliers if the plastic panel is too
difcult to remove by hand.
3.
Use scissors to cut down the length of the
insulating sleeve to reveal about 15cm (6in)
of the refrigerant piping. This serves two
purposes:
To facilitate the Refrigerant Piping
Connection process
To facilitate Gas Leak Checks and enable
you to check for dents
4.
If existing connective piping is already
embedded in the wall, proceed directly to
the Connect Drain Hose step. If there is no
embedded piping, connect the indoor unit’s
refrigerant piping to the connective piping
that will join the indoor and outdoor units.
Refer to the Refrigerant Piping Connection
section of this manual for detailed instructions.
5.
Based on the position of the wall hole
relative to the mounting plate, determine the
necessary angle of your piping.
6.
Grip the refrigerant piping at the base of the
bend.
7.
Slowly, with even pressure, bend the piping
towards the hole. Do not dent or damage the
piping during the process.
NOTE ON PIPING ANGLE
Refrigerant piping can exit the indoor unit from
four different angles:
Left-hand side
Left rear
Right-hand side
Right rear
Refer to
Fig. 3.4 for details.
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Knock-out Panel
Page 15
Step 5:
Connect drain hose
By default, the drain hose is attached to the left-
hand side of unit (when you’re facing the back
of the unit). However, it can also be attached to
the right-hand side.
1.
To ensure proper drainage, attach the drain
hose on the same side that your refrigerant
piping exits the unit.
2.
Attach drain hose extension (purchased
separately) to the end of drain hose.
3.
Wrap the connection point rmly with Teon
tape to ensure a good seal and to prevent
leaks.
4.
For the portion of the drain hose that will
remain indoors, wrap it with foam pipe
insulation to prevent condensation.
5.
Remove the air lter and pour a small amount
of water into the drain pan to make sure that
water ows from the unit smoothly.
NOTE ON DRAIN HOSE
PLACEMENT
Make sure to arrange the drain hose
according to
Fig. 3.5.
DO NOT
kink the drain hose.
DO NOT
create a water trap.
DO NOT
put the end of drain hose in
water or a container that will collect
water.
PLUG THE UNUSED DRAIN HOLE
To prevent unwanted leaks you must plug
the unused drain hole with the rubber plug
provided.
CORRECT
Make sure there are no
kinks or dent in drain
hose to ensure proper
drainage.
NOT CORRECT
Kinks in the drain hose
will create water traps.
NOT CORRECT
Do not place the end
of the drain hose in
water or in containers
that collect water. This
will prevent proper
drainage.
NOT CORRECT
Kinks in the drain hose
will create water traps.
Fig. 3.5
Fig. 3.6
Fig. 3.7
Fig. 3.8
Page 16
BEFORE PERFORMING ELECTRICAL WORK, READ THESE REGULATIONS
1.
All wiring must comply with local and national electrical codes, and must be installed by a
licensed electrician.
2.
All electrical connections must be made according to the Electrical Connection Diagram
located on the panels of the indoor and outdoor units.
3.
If there is a serious safety issue with the power supply, stop work immediately. Explain your
reasoning to the client, and refuse to install the unit until the safety issue is properly resolved.
4.
Power voltage should be within 90-110% of rated voltage. Insufcient power supply can
cause malfunction, electrical shock, or re.
5.
If connecting power to xed wiring, install a surge protector and main power switch with a
capacity of 1.5 times the maximum current of the unit.
6.
If connecting power to xed wiring, a switch or circuit breaker that disconnects all poles and
has a contact separation of at least 1/8in (3mm) must be incorporated in the xed wiring. The
qualied technician must use an approved circuit breaker or switch.
7.
Only connect the unit to an individual branch circuit outlet. Do not connect another appliance
to that outlet.
8.
Make sure to properly ground the air conditioner.
9.
Every wire must be rmly connected. Loose wiring can cause the terminal to overheat,
resulting in product malfunction and possible re.
10.
Do not let wires touch or rest against refrigerant tubing, the compressor, or any moving parts
within the unit.
11.
If the unit has an auxiliary electric heater, it must be installed at least 1 meter (40in) away
from any combustible materials.
WARNING
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY ELECTRICAL OR WIRING WORK, TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER
TO THE SYSTEM.
Page 16
BEFORE PERFORMING ELECTRICAL WORK, READ THESE REGULATIONS
1.
All wiring must comply with local and national electrical codes, and must be installed by a
licensed electrician.
2.
All electrical connections must be made according to the Electrical Connection Diagram
located on the panels of the indoor and outdoor units.
3.
If there is a serious safety issue with the power supply, stop work immediately. Explain your
reasoning to the client, and refuse to install the unit until the safety issue is properly resolved.
4.
Power voltage should be within 90-110% of rated voltage. Insufcient power supply can
cause malfunction, electrical shock, or re.
5.
If connecting power to xed wiring, install a surge protector and main power switch with a
capacity of 1.5 times the maximum current of the unit.
6.
If connecting power to xed wiring, a switch or circuit breaker that disconnects all poles and
has a contact separation of at least 1/8in (3mm) must be incorporated in the xed wiring. The
qualied technician must use an approved circuit breaker or switch.
7.
Only connect the unit to an individual branch circuit outlet. Do not connect another appliance
to that outlet.
8.
Make sure to properly ground the air conditioner.
9.
Every wire must be rmly connected. Loose wiring can cause the terminal to overheat,
resulting in product malfunction and possible re.
10.
Do not let wires touch or rest against refrigerant tubing, the compressor, or any moving parts
within the unit.
11.
If the unit has an auxiliary electric heater, it must be installed at least 1 meter (40in) away
from any combustible materials.
WARNING
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY ELECTRICAL OR WIRING WORK, TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER
TO THE SYSTEM.
Page 17
Step 6: Connect signal cable
The signal cable enables communication between
the indoor and outdoor units. You must rst
choose the right cable size before preparing it for
connection.
Cable Types
Indoor Power Cable (if applicable):
H05VV-F or H05V2V2-F
Outdoor Power Cable: H07RN-F
Signal Cable: H07RN-F
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Power and Signal Cables
Other Regions
Rated Current of
Appliance (A)
Nominal Cross-Sectional
Area (mm²)
> 3 and 6 0.75
> 6 and 10 1
> 10 and 16 1.5
> 16 and 25 2.5
> 25 and 32 4
> 32 and 40 6
CHOOSE THE RIGHT CABLE SIZE
The size of the power supply cable, signal
cable, fuse, and switch needed is determined
by the maximum current of the unit. The
maximum current is indicated on the nameplate
located on the side panel of the unit. Refer to
this nameplate to choose the right cable, fuse,
or switch.
TAKE NOTE OF FUSE SPECIFICATIONS
The air conditioner’s circuit board (PCB) is
designed with a fuse to provide overcurrent
protection. The specications of the fuse
1.
Prepare the cable for connection:
a.
Using wire strippers, strip the rubber jacket
from both ends of signal cable to reveal
about 40mm (1.57in) of the wires inside.
b.
Strip the insulation from the ends of the
wires.
c.
Using wire crimper, crimp u-type lugs on
the ends of the wires.
PAY ATTENTION TO LIVE WIRE
While crimping wires, make sure you clearly
distinguish the Live (“L”) Wire from other wires.
2. O
pen front panel of the indoor unit.
3.
Using a screwdriver, open the wire box cover
on the right side of the unit. This will reveal
the terminal block.
Terminal block
Wire cover
Screw
Cable clamp
WARNING
4.
Unscrew the cable clamp below the terminal
block and place it to the side.
Fig. 3.9
The Wiring Diagram is located
on the inside of the indoor unit’s
wire cover.
North America
Appliance Amps (A) AWG
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
ALL WIRING MUST PERFORMED STRICTLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING
DIAGRAM LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF THE
INDOOR UNIT S WIRE COVER.
are printed on the circuit board, such as:
Indoor unit: T5A/250VAC
Outdoor unit(applicalbe to units adpot
R32 or R290 refrigerant only):
T20A/250VAC(<=18000Btu/h units)
T30A/250VAC(>18000Btu/h units)
NOTE: The fuse is made of ceramic.
Page 18
5.
Facing the back of the unit, remove the plastic
panel on the bottom left-hand side.
6. Feed the signal wire through this slot, from
the back of the unit to the front.
7. Facing the front of the unit, match the wire
colors with the labels on the terminal block,
connect the u-lug and and rmly screw each
wire to its corresponding terminal.
CAUTION
DO NOT MIX UP LIVE AND NULL WIRES
This is dangerous, and can cause the air
conditioning unit to malfunction.
8.
After checking to make sure every connection
is secure, use the cable clamp to fasten the
signal cable to the unit. Screw the cable clamp
down tightly.
9.
Replace the wire cover on the front of the
unit, and the plastic panel on the back.
NOTE ABOUT WIRING
Step 7: Wrap piping and cables
Before passing the piping, drain hose, and the
signal cable through the wall hole, you must
bundle them together to save space, protect
them, and insulate them.
1.
Bundle the drain hose, refrigerant pipes, and
signal cable according to Fig. 3.10.
Indoor Unit
Space behind unit
Refrigerant piping
Drain hose
Signal wire
Insulation tape
DRAIN HOSE MUST BE ON BOTTOM
Make sure that the drain hose is at the bottom
of the bundle. Putting the drain hose at the
top of the bundle can cause the drain pan
to overow, which can lead to re or water
damage.
DO NOT INTERTWINE SIGNAL CABLE WITH
OTHER WIRES
While bundling these items together, do not
intertwine or cross the signal cable with any
other wiring.
2.
Using adhesive vinyl tape, attach the drain
hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes.
3.
Using insulation tape, wrap the signal wire,
refrigerant pipes, and drain hose tightly
together. Double-check that all items are
bundled in accordance with Fig. 3.10.
DO NOT WRAP ENDS OF PIPING
When wrapping the bundle, keep the ends
of the piping unwrapped. You need to access
them to test for leaks at the end of the
installation process (refer to Electrical Checks
and Leak Checks section of this manual).
Step 8: Mount indoor unit
If you installed new connective piping to the
outdoor unit, do the following:
1.
If you have already passed the refrigerant
piping through the hole in the wall, proceed
to Step 4.
2.
Otherwise, double-check that the ends of the
refrigerant pipes are sealed to prevent dirt or
foreign materials from entering the pipes.
3.
Slowly pass the wrapped bundle of refrigerant
pipes, drain hose, and signal wire through the
hole in the wall.
4.
Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper
hook of the mounting plate.
5.
Check that unit is hooked rmly on mounting
by applying slight pressure to the left and
right-hand sides of the unit. The unit should
not jiggle or shift.
6.
Using even pressure, push down on the
bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down
until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the
bottom of the mounting plate.
7.
Again, check that the unit is rmly mounted
by applying slight pressure to the left and the
right-hand sides of the unit.
Fig. 3.10
THE WIRING CONNECTION PROCESS MAY
DIFFER SLIGHTLY BETWEEN UNITS.
Page 18
5.
Facing the back of the unit, remove the plastic
panel on the bottom left-hand side.
6. Feed the signal wire through this slot, from
the back of the unit to the front.
7. Facing the front of the unit, match the wire
colors with the labels on the terminal block,
connect the u-lug and and rmly screw each
wire to its corresponding terminal.
CAUTION
DO NOT MIX UP LIVE AND NULL WIRES
This is dangerous, and can cause the air
conditioning unit to malfunction.
8.
After checking to make sure every connection
is secure, use the cable clamp to fasten the
signal cable to the unit. Screw the cable clamp
down tightly.
9.
Replace the wire cover on the front of the
unit, and the plastic panel on the back.
NOTE ABOUT WIRING
Step 7: Wrap piping and cables
Before passing the piping, drain hose, and the
signal cable through the wall hole, you must
bundle them together to save space, protect
them, and insulate them.
1.
Bundle the drain hose, refrigerant pipes, and
signal cable according to Fig. 3.10.
Indoor Unit
Space behind unit
Refrigerant piping
Drain hose
Signal wire
Insulation tape
DRAIN HOSE MUST BE ON BOTTOM
Make sure that the drain hose is at the bottom
of the bundle. Putting the drain hose at the
top of the bundle can cause the drain pan
to overow, which can lead to re or water
damage.
DO NOT INTERTWINE SIGNAL CABLE WITH
OTHER WIRES
While bundling these items together, do not
intertwine or cross the signal cable with any
other wiring.
2.
Using adhesive vinyl tape, attach the drain
hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes.
3.
Using insulation tape, wrap the signal wire,
refrigerant pipes, and drain hose tightly
together. Double-check that all items are
bundled in accordance with Fig. 3.10.
DO NOT WRAP ENDS OF PIPING
When wrapping the bundle, keep the ends
of the piping unwrapped. You need to access
them to test for leaks at the end of the
installation process (refer to Electrical Checks
and Leak Checks section of this manual).
Step 8: Mount indoor unit
If you installed new connective piping to the
outdoor unit, do the following:
1.
If you have already passed the refrigerant
piping through the hole in the wall, proceed
to Step 4.
2.
Otherwise, double-check that the ends of the
refrigerant pipes are sealed to prevent dirt or
foreign materials from entering the pipes.
3.
Slowly pass the wrapped bundle of refrigerant
pipes, drain hose, and signal wire through the
hole in the wall.
4.
Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper
hook of the mounting plate.
5.
Check that unit is hooked rmly on mounting
by applying slight pressure to the left and
right-hand sides of the unit. The unit should
not jiggle or shift.
6.
Using even pressure, push down on the
bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down
until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the
bottom of the mounting plate.
7.
Again, check that the unit is rmly mounted
by applying slight pressure to the left and the
right-hand sides of the unit.
Fig. 3.10
THE WIRING CONNECTION PROCESS MAY
DIFFER SLIGHTLY BETWEEN UNITS.
Page 19
If refrigerant piping is already embedded in
the wall, do the following:
1.
Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper
hook of the mounting plate.
2.
Use a bracket or wedge to prop up the unit,
giving you enough room to connect the
refrigerant piping, signal cable, and drain
hose. Refer to Fig. 3.11 for an example.
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Move to left or right
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
3.
Connect drain hose and refrigerant piping
(refer to Refrigerant Piping Connection
section of this manual for instructions).
4.
Keep pipe connection point exposed to
perform the leak test (refer to Electrical
Checks and Leak Checks section of this
manual).
5.
After the leak test, wrap the connection point
with insulation tape.
6.
Remove the bracket or wedge that is propping
up the unit.
7.
Using even pressure, push down on the
bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down
until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the
bottom of the mounting plate.
UNIT IS ADJUSTABLE
Keep in mind that the hooks on the mounting plate are smaller than the holes on the back of the
unit. If you nd that you don’t have ample room to connect embedded pipes to the indoor unit, the
unit can be adjusted left or right by about 30-50mm (1.25-1.95in), depending on the model. (See
Fig. 3.12
.)
Page 20
Outdoor Unit Installation 5
evoba )ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
on right
30cm (12in)
on left
200cm (79in)
in front
30cm (12in)
from back wall
Installation Instructions – Outdoor
Unit
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the outdoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Meets all spatial requirements shown in
Installation Space Requirements (Fig. 4.1)
o
Good air circulation and ventilation
o
Firm and solid—the location can support the
unit and will not vibrate
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb others
o
Protected from prolonged periods of direct
sunlight or rain
DO NOT
install unit in the following locations:
Near an obstacle that will block air inlets
and outlets
Near a public street, crowded areas, or
where noise from the unit will disturb others
Near animals or plants that will be harmed
by hot air discharge
Near any source of combustible gas
In a location that is exposed to large
amounts of dust
In a location exposed to a excessive amounts
of salty air
Fig. 4.1
Page 20
Outdoor Unit Installation 5
evoba )ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
on right
30cm (12in)
on left
200cm (79in)
in front
30cm (12in)
from back wall
Installation Instructions – Outdoor
Unit
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the outdoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Meets all spatial requirements shown in
Installation Space Requirements (Fig. 4.1)
o
Good air circulation and ventilation
o
Firm and solid—the location can support the
unit and will not vibrate
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb others
o
Protected from prolonged periods of direct
sunlight or rain
DO NOT
install unit in the following locations:
Near an obstacle that will block air inlets
and outlets
Near a public street, crowded areas, or
where noise from the unit will disturb others
Near animals or plants that will be harmed
by hot air discharge
Near any source of combustible gas
In a location that is exposed to large
amounts of dust
In a location exposed to a excessive amounts
of salty air
Fig. 4.1
Page 21
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR EXTREME
WEATHER
If the unit is exposed to heavy wind:
Install unit so that air outlet fan is at a 90°
angle to the direction of the wind. If needed,
build a barrier in front of the unit to protect it
from extremely heavy winds.
See Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.3 below.
Strong wind
Strong wind
Strong wind
If the unit is frequently exposed to heavy
rain or snow:
Build a shelter above the unit to protect
it from the rain or snow. Be careful not to
obstruct air ow around the unit.
If the unit is frequently exposed to salty air
(seaside):
Use outdoor unit that is specially designed to
resist corrosion.
Step 2: Install drain joint
Heat pump units require a drain joint. Before
bolting the outdoor unit in place, you must install
the drain joint at the bottom of the unit. Note
that there are two different types of drain joints
depending on the type of outdoor unit.
If the drain joint comes with a rubber seal
(see Fig. 4.4 - A ), do the following:
1.
Fit the rubber seal on the end of the drain joint
that will connect to the outdoor unit.
2.
Insert the drain joint into the hole in the base
pan of the unit.
3.
Rotate the drain joint 90° until it clicks in place
facing the front of the unit.
4.
Connect a drain hose extension (not included)
to the drain joint to redirect water from the
unit during heating mode.
If the drain joint doesn’t come with a rubber
seal (see Fig. 4.4 - B ), do the following:
1.
Insert the drain joint into the hole in the base
pan of the unit. The drain joint will click in
place.
2.
Connect a drain hose extension (not included)
to the drain joint to redirect water from the
unit during heating mode.
Seal
Drain joint
(A) (B)
Base pan hole of
outdoor unit
Seal
IN COLD CLIMATES
In cold climates, make sure that the drain hose
is as vertical as possible to ensure swift water
drainage. If water drains too slowly, it can
freeze in the hose and ood the unit.
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.4
Wind Baffle
Page 22
If you will install the unit on the ground or
on a concrete mounting platform, do the
following:
1. Mark the positions for four expansion bolts
based on dimensions in the Unit Mounting
Dimensions chart.
2. Pre-drill holes for expansion bolts.
3. Clean concrete dust away from holes.
4. Place a nut on the end of each expansion bolt.
5. Hammer expansion bolts into the pre-drilled
holes.
6. Remove the nuts from expansion bolts, and
place outdoor unit on bolts.
7. Put washer on each expansion bolt, then
replace the nuts.
8. Using a wrench, tighten each nut until snug.
WARNING
Step 3: Anchor outdoor unit
The outdoor unit can be anchored
to the ground or to a wall-mounted
bracket.
UNIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
The following is a list of different
outdoor unit sizes and the distance
between their mounting feet.
Prepare the installation base of the
unit according to the dimensions
below.
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
Fig. 4.5
WHEN DRILLING INTO CONCRETE, EYE
PROTECTION IS RECOMMENDED AT ALL
TIMES.
Outdoor Unit Dimensions (mm)
W x H x D
Mounting Dimensions
Distance A (mm) Distance B (mm)
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Page 22
If you will install the unit on the ground or
on a concrete mounting platform, do the
following:
1. Mark the positions for four expansion bolts
based on dimensions in the Unit Mounting
Dimensions chart.
2. Pre-drill holes for expansion bolts.
3. Clean concrete dust away from holes.
4. Place a nut on the end of each expansion bolt.
5. Hammer expansion bolts into the pre-drilled
holes.
6. Remove the nuts from expansion bolts, and
place outdoor unit on bolts.
7. Put washer on each expansion bolt, then
replace the nuts.
8. Using a wrench, tighten each nut until snug.
WARNING
Step 3: Anchor outdoor unit
The outdoor unit can be anchored
to the ground or to a wall-mounted
bracket.
UNIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
The following is a list of different
outdoor unit sizes and the distance
between their mounting feet.
Prepare the installation base of the
unit according to the dimensions
below.
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
Fig. 4.5
WHEN DRILLING INTO CONCRETE, EYE
PROTECTION IS RECOMMENDED AT ALL
TIMES.
Outdoor Unit Dimensions (mm)
W x H x D
Mounting Dimensions
Distance A (mm) Distance B (mm)
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Page 23
If you will install the unit on a wall-mounted
bracket , do the following:
CAUTION
Before installing a wall-mounted unit, make
sure that the wall is made of solid brick,
concrete, or of similarly strong material. The
wall must be able to support at least four
times the weight of the unit.
1.
Mark the position of bracket holes based on
dimensions in the Unit Mounting Dimensions
chart.
2.
Pre-drill the holes for the expansion bolts.
3.
Clean dust and debris away from holes.
4.
Place a washer and nut on the end of each
expansion bolt.
5.
Thread expansion bolts through holes in
mounting brackets, put mounting brackets
in position, and hammer expansion bolts into
the wall.
6.
Check that the mounting brackets are level.
7.
Carefully lift unit and place its mounting feet
on brackets.
8.
Bolt the unit rmly to the brackets.
TO REDUCE VIBRATIONS OF WALL-
MOUNTED UNIT
If allowed, you can install the wall-mounted
unit with rubber gaskets to reduce vibrations
and noise.
Step 4: Connect signal and power cables
The outside unit’s terminal block is protected by
an electrical wiring cover on the side of the unit.
A comprehensive wiring diagram is printed on
the inside of the wiring cover.
BEFORE PERFORMING
ELECTRICAL WORK,
READ THESE REGULATIONS
1.
All wiring must comply with local and
national electrical codes, and must be
installed by a licensed electrician.
2.
All electrical connections must be made
according to the Electrical Connection
Diagram located on the side panels of the
indoor and outdoor units.
3.
If there is a serious safety issue with the
power supply, stop work immediately. Explain
your reasoning to the client, and refuse
to install the unit until the safety issue is
properly resolved.
4.
Power voltage should be within 90-110% of
rated voltage. Insufcient power supply can
cause electrical shock or re.
5.
If connecting power to xed wiring, install a
surge protector and main power switch with
a capacity of 1.5 times the maximum current
of the unit.
6.
If connecting power to xed wiring, a switch
or circuit breaker that disconnects all poles
and has a contact separation of at least 1/8in
(3mm) must be incorporated in the xed
wiring. The qualied technician must use an
approved circuit breaker or switch.
7.
Only connect the unit to an individual branch
circuit outlet. Do not connect another
appliance to that outlet.
8.
Make sure to properly ground the air
conditioner.
9.
Every wire must be rmly connected. Loose
wiring can cause the terminal to overheat,
resulting in product malfunction and possible
re.
10. Do not
let wires touch or rest against
refrigerant tubing, the compressor, or any
moving parts within the unit.
11.
If the unit has an auxiliary electric heater, it
must be installed at least 1 meter (40in) away
from any combustible materials.
Page 24
WARNING
1. Prepare the cable for connection:
USE THE RIGHT CABLE
Indoor Power Cable (if applicable): H05VV-F
or H05V2V2-F
Outdoor Power Cable: H07RN-F
Signal Cable: H07RN-F
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Power and Signal Cables
Other Regions
Rated Current of
Appliance (A)
Nominal Cross-
Sectional Area (mm²)
> 3 and 6 0.75
> 6 and 10 1
> 10 and 16 1.5
> 16 and 25 2.5
> 25 and 32 4
> 32 and 40 6
a. Using wire strippers, strip the rubber
jacket from both ends of cable to reveal
about 40mm (1.57in) of the wires inside.
b. Strip the insulation from the ends of the
wires.
c. Using a wire crimper, crimp u-lugs on the
ends of the wires.
PAY ATTENTION TO LIVE WIRE
While crimping wires, make sure you clearly
distinguish the Live (“L”) Wire from other wires.
2.
Unscrew the electrical wiring cover and
remove it.
3.
Unscrew the cable clamp below the terminal
block and place it to the side.
4.
Match the wire colors/labels with the labels on
the terminal block, and rmly screw the u-lug
of each wire to its corresponding terminal.
5.
After checking to make sure every connection
is secure, loop the wires around to prevent
rain water from owing into the terminal.
6.
Using the cable clamp, fasten the cable to the
unit. Screw the cable clamp down tightly.
7.
Insulate unused wires with PVC electrical tape.
Arrange them so that they do not touch any
electrical or metal parts.
8.
Replace the wire cover on the side of the unit,
and screw it in place.
Cover
Outdoor Unit Wiring Diagram
is located on the inside of the
wire cover on the outdoor unit.
Fig. 4.6
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY ELECTRICAL
OR WIRING WORK, TURN OFF THE MAIN
POWER TO THE SYSTEM.
WARNING
ALL WIRING MUST PERFORMED STRICTLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING
DIRGRAM LOCATED INSIDE THE OUTDOOR
UNIT S WIRE COVER.
North America
Appliance Amps (A) AWG
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Page 24
WARNING
1. Prepare the cable for connection:
USE THE RIGHT CABLE
Indoor Power Cable (if applicable): H05VV-F
or H05V2V2-F
Outdoor Power Cable: H07RN-F
Signal Cable: H07RN-F
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Power and Signal Cables
Other Regions
Rated Current of
Appliance (A)
Nominal Cross-
Sectional Area (mm²)
> 3 and 6 0.75
> 6 and 10 1
> 10 and 16 1.5
> 16 and 25 2.5
> 25 and 32 4
> 32 and 40 6
a. Using wire strippers, strip the rubber
jacket from both ends of cable to reveal
about 40mm (1.57in) of the wires inside.
b. Strip the insulation from the ends of the
wires.
c. Using a wire crimper, crimp u-lugs on the
ends of the wires.
PAY ATTENTION TO LIVE WIRE
While crimping wires, make sure you clearly
distinguish the Live (“L”) Wire from other wires.
2.
Unscrew the electrical wiring cover and
remove it.
3.
Unscrew the cable clamp below the terminal
block and place it to the side.
4.
Match the wire colors/labels with the labels on
the terminal block, and rmly screw the u-lug
of each wire to its corresponding terminal.
5.
After checking to make sure every connection
is secure, loop the wires around to prevent
rain water from owing into the terminal.
6.
Using the cable clamp, fasten the cable to the
unit. Screw the cable clamp down tightly.
7.
Insulate unused wires with PVC electrical tape.
Arrange them so that they do not touch any
electrical or metal parts.
8.
Replace the wire cover on the side of the unit,
and screw it in place.
Cover
Outdoor Unit Wiring Diagram
is located on the inside of the
wire cover on the outdoor unit.
Fig. 4.6
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY ELECTRICAL
OR WIRING WORK, TURN OFF THE MAIN
POWER TO THE SYSTEM.
WARNING
ALL WIRING MUST PERFORMED STRICTLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING
DIRGRAM LOCATED INSIDE THE OUTDOOR
UNIT S WIRE COVER.
North America
Appliance Amps (A) AWG
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Page 25
Refrigerant Piping Connection 6
Note on Pipe Length
The length of refrigerant piping will affect the performance and energy efciency of the unit. Nominal
efciency is tested on units with a pipe length of 5 meters (16.5ft). A minimum pipe run of 3 metres is
required to minimise vibration & excessive noise.
For special tropical area, the maximum length of refrigerant pipe should not exceed 10 meters(32.8ft)
and no refrigerant can be added(For R290 refrigerant models).
Connection Instructions –
Refrigerant Piping
Step 1: Cut pipes
When preparing refrigerant pipes, take extra care
to cut and are them properly. This will ensure
efcient operation and minimize the need for
future maintenance. For R32/R290 refrigerant
models, the pipe connection points must be
placed outside of room.
1. Measure the distance between the indoor and
outdoor units.
2. Using a pipe cutter, cut the pipe a little longer
than the measured distance.
3. Make sure that the pipe is cut at a perfect 90°
angle. Refer to Fig. 5.1 for bad cut examples.
Oblique Rough Warped
90°
Fig. 5.1
Refer to the table below for specications on the maximum length and drop height of piping.
Maximum Length and Drop Height of Refrigerant Piping per Unit Model
Model Capacity (BTU/h) Max. Length (m) Max. Drop Height (m)
R410A Inverter Split Air
Conditioner
< 15,000 25 (82ft) 10 (33ft)
15,000 and < 24,000 30 (98.5ft) 20 (66ft)
24,000 and < 36,000 50 (164ft) 25 (82ft)
36,000 and 60,000 65 (213ft) 30 (98.5ft)
Page 26
DO NOT DEFORM PIPE
WHILE CUTTING
Be extra careful not to damage, dent, or
deform the pipe while cutting. This will
drastically reduce the heating efciency
of the unit.
Step 2: Remove burrs
Burrs can affect the air-tight seal of refrigerant
piping connection. They must be completely
removed.
1.
Hold the pipe at a downward angle to prevent
burrs from falling into the pipe.
2.
Using a reamer or deburring tool, remove all
burrs from the cut section of the pipe.
Pipe
Reamer
Point down
Step 3: Flare pipe ends
Proper aring is essential to achieve an airtight
seal.
1.
After removing burrs from cut pipe, seal
the ends with PVC tape to prevent foreign
materials from entering the pipe.
2.
Sheath the pipe with insulating material.
3.
Place are nuts on both ends of pipe. Make
sure they are facing in the right direction,
because you can’t put them on or change
their direction after aring. See
Fig. 5.3.
Flare nut
Copper pipe
4.
Remove PVC tape from ends of pipe when
ready to perform aring work.
5.
Clamp are form on the end of the pipe.
The end of the pipe must extend beyond the
edge of the are form in accordance with the
dimensions shown in the table below.
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
Max.
PIPING EXTENSION BEYOND FLARE FORM
Outer Diameter of
Pipe (mm)
A (mm)
Min. Max.
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø12.7 ( Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 ( Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 ( Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
Flare form
Pipe
A
Fig. 5.5
Page 26
DO NOT DEFORM PIPE
WHILE CUTTING
Be extra careful not to damage, dent, or
deform the pipe while cutting. This will
drastically reduce the heating efciency
of the unit.
Step 2: Remove burrs
Burrs can affect the air-tight seal of refrigerant
piping connection. They must be completely
removed.
1.
Hold the pipe at a downward angle to prevent
burrs from falling into the pipe.
2.
Using a reamer or deburring tool, remove all
burrs from the cut section of the pipe.
Pipe
Reamer
Point down
Step 3: Flare pipe ends
Proper aring is essential to achieve an airtight
seal.
1.
After removing burrs from cut pipe, seal
the ends with PVC tape to prevent foreign
materials from entering the pipe.
2.
Sheath the pipe with insulating material.
3.
Place are nuts on both ends of pipe. Make
sure they are facing in the right direction,
because you can’t put them on or change
their direction after aring. See
Fig. 5.3.
Flare nut
Copper pipe
4.
Remove PVC tape from ends of pipe when
ready to perform aring work.
5.
Clamp are form on the end of the pipe.
The end of the pipe must extend beyond the
edge of the are form in accordance with the
dimensions shown in the table below.
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
Max.
PIPING EXTENSION BEYOND FLARE FORM
Outer Diameter of
Pipe (mm)
A (mm)
Min. Max.
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø12.7 ( Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 ( Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 ( Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
Flare form
Pipe
A
Fig. 5.5
Page 27
6.
Place aring tool onto the form.
7.
Turn the handle of the aring tool clockwise
until the pipe is fully ared.
8.
Remove the aring tool and are form, then
inspect the end of the pipe for cracks and
even aring.
Step 4: Connect pipes
When connecting refrigerant pipes, be careful
not to use excessive torque or to deform the
piping in any way. You should rst connect the
indoor unit, then the outdoor unit.
MINIMUM BEND RADIUS
When bending connective refrigerant piping,
the minimum bending radius is 10cm. See
Fig.5.6.
≥10cm (4in)Radius
TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
Instructions for Connecting Piping to
Indoor Unit
1.
Align the center of the two pipes that you will
connect. See Fig. 5.7
.
Indoor unit tubing Flare nut Pipe
2.
Tighten the are nut as tightly as possible by
hand.
3.
Using a spanner, grip the nut on the unit
tubing.
4.
While rmly gripping the nut on the unit
tubing, use a torque wrench to tighten the
are nut according to the torque values in the
Torque Requirements table below. Loosen
the aring nut slightly, then tighten again.
Fig. 5.6
Fig. 5.7
Fig. 5.8
Connection
Outer Diameter of Pipe (mm) Tightening Torque (N•cm) Add. Tightening Torque (N•cm)
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 1,500 (11lb•ft) 1,600 (11.8lb•ft)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 2,500 (18.4lb•ft) 2,600 (19.18lb•ft)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 3,500 (25.8lb•ft) 3,600 (26.55lb•ft)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
4,500 (33.19lb•ft)
6,500 (47.94lb•ft)
4,700 (34.67lb•ft)
6,700 (49.42lb•ft)
DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE TORQUE
Excessive force can break the nut or damage the refrigerant piping. You must not exceed torque
requirements shown in the table above.
Page 28
Instructions for Connecting Piping
to Outdoor Unit
1.
Unscrew the cover from the packed valve on
the side of the outdoor unit. (See Fig. 5.9)
2.
Remove protective caps from ends of valves.
3.
Align ared pipe end with each valve, and
tighten the are nut as tightly as possible by
hand.
4.
Using a spanner, grip the body of the valve.
Do not grip the nut that seals the service
valve. (See Fig. 5.10)
USE SPANNER TO GRIP MAIN
BODY OF VALVE
Torque from tightening the are nut can snap
off other parts of valve.
5.
While rmly gripping the body of the valve,
use a torque wrench to tighten the are nut
according to the correct torque values.
6.
Loosen the aring nut slightly, then tighten
again.
7.
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 for the remaining pipe.
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
Valve cover
Page 28
Instructions for Connecting Piping
to Outdoor Unit
1.
Unscrew the cover from the packed valve on
the side of the outdoor unit. (See Fig. 5.9)
2.
Remove protective caps from ends of valves.
3.
Align ared pipe end with each valve, and
tighten the are nut as tightly as possible by
hand.
4.
Using a spanner, grip the body of the valve.
Do not grip the nut that seals the service
valve. (See Fig. 5.10)
USE SPANNER TO GRIP MAIN
BODY OF VALVE
Torque from tightening the are nut can snap
off other parts of valve.
5.
While rmly gripping the body of the valve,
use a torque wrench to tighten the are nut
according to the correct torque values.
6.
Loosen the aring nut slightly, then tighten
again.
7.
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 for the remaining pipe.
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
Valve cover
Page 29
Air Evacuation 7
Preparations and Precautions
Air and foreign matter in the refrigerant circuit
can cause abnormal rises in pressure, which
can damage the air conditioner, reduce its
efciency, and cause injury. Use a vacuum pump
and manifold gauge to evacuate the refrigerant
circuit, removing any non-condensable gas and
moisture from the system.
Evacuation should be performed upon initial
installation and when unit is relocated.
BEFORE PERFORMING EVACUATION
o
Check to make sure that both high-
pressure and low-pressure pipes between
the indoor and outdoor units are
connected properly in accordance with the
Refrigerant Piping Connection section of
this manual.
o
Check to make sure all wiring is connected
properly.
Evacuation Instructions
Before using the manifold gauge and vacuum
pump, read their operation manuals to familiarize
yourself with how to use them properly.
Manifold Gauge
Compound gauge
-76cmHg
Low pressure valve
High pressure
valve
Pressure hose /
Charge hose
Charge hose
Vacuum
pump
Pressure gauge
Low pressure valve
1.
Connect the charge hose of the manifold
gauge to service port on the outdoor unit’s
low pressure valve.
2.
Connect another charge hose from the
manifold gauge to the vacuum pump.
MC MC
Fig. 6.1
3.
Open the Low Pressure side of the manifold
gauge. Keep the High Pressure side closed.
4.
Turn on the vacuum pump to evacuate the
system.
5.
Run the vacuum for at least 15 minutes, or
until the Compound Meter reads -76cmHG
(-10 Pa).
5
Page 30
CAUTION DO NOT mix refrigerant types.
6.
Close the Low Pressure side of the manifold
gauge, and turn off the vacuum pump.
7.
Wait for 5 minutes, then check that there
has been no change in system pressure.
8.
If there is a change in system pressure, refer
to Gas Leak Check section for information
on how to check for leaks. If there is no
change in system pressure, unscrew the cap
from the packed valve (high pressure valve).
9.
Insert hexagonal wrench into the packed valve
(high pressure valve) and open the valve by
turning the wrench in a 1/4 counterclockwise
turn. Listen for gas to exit the system, then
close the valve after 5 seconds.
10.
Watch the Pressure Gauge for one minute
to make sure that there is no change in
pressure. The Pressure Gauge should read
slightly higher than atmospheric pressure.
For R290 refrigerant unit, the total amount of refrigerant to be charged is no more than:
387g(<=9000Btu/h), 447g(>9000Btu/h and <=12000Btu/h), 547g(>12000Btu/h and <=18000Btu/h),
632g(>18000Btu/h and <=24000Btu/h).
Flare nut
Cap
alve body
Valve stem
11.
Remove the charge hose from the service port.
12.
Using hexagonal wrench, fully open both the
high pressure and low pressure valves.
13.
Tighten valve caps on all three valves (service
port, high pressure, low pressure) by hand.
You may tighten it further using a torque
wrench if needed.
OPEN VALVE STEMS GENTLY
When opening valve stems, turn the hexagonal
wrench until it hits against the stopper. Do not
try to force the valve to open further.
Note on Adding Refrigerant
ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT PER PIPE LENGTH
Connective Pipe
Length (m)
Air Purging
Method Additional Refrigerant
< Standard pipe length Vacuum Pump N/A
> Standard pipe
length
Vacuum Pump
Liquid Side: Ø 6.35 (ø 0.25”)
R32:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 12g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.13oZ/ft
R290: R290:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 10g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.10oZ/ft
Liquid Side: Ø 9.52 (ø 0.375”)
R32:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 24g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.26oZ/ft
(Pipe length – standard length) x 18g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.19oZ/ft
Fig. 6.2
Some systems require additional charging depending on pipe lengths. The standard pipe length varies
according to local regulations. For example, in North America, the standard pipe length is 7.5m (25’).
In other areas, the standard pipe length is 5m (16‘). The refrigerant should be charged from the
service port
on the outdoor unit’s low pressure valve.
The additional refrigerant to be charged can be
calculated using the following formula:
R410A: R410A:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 15g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.16oZ/ft
(Pipe length – standard length) x 30g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.32oZ/ft
Page 30
CAUTION DO NOT mix refrigerant types.
6.
Close the Low Pressure side of the manifold
gauge, and turn off the vacuum pump.
7.
Wait for 5 minutes, then check that there
has been no change in system pressure.
8.
If there is a change in system pressure, refer
to Gas Leak Check section for information
on how to check for leaks. If there is no
change in system pressure, unscrew the cap
from the packed valve (high pressure valve).
9.
Insert hexagonal wrench into the packed valve
(high pressure valve) and open the valve by
turning the wrench in a 1/4 counterclockwise
turn. Listen for gas to exit the system, then
close the valve after 5 seconds.
10.
Watch the Pressure Gauge for one minute
to make sure that there is no change in
pressure. The Pressure Gauge should read
slightly higher than atmospheric pressure.
For R290 refrigerant unit, the total amount of refrigerant to be charged is no more than:
387g(<=9000Btu/h), 447g(>9000Btu/h and <=12000Btu/h), 547g(>12000Btu/h and <=18000Btu/h),
632g(>18000Btu/h and <=24000Btu/h).
Flare nut
Cap
V
alve body
Valve stem
11.
Remove the charge hose from the service port.
12.
Using hexagonal wrench, fully open both the
high pressure and low pressure valves.
13.
Tighten valve caps on all three valves (service
port, high pressure, low pressure) by hand.
You may tighten it further using a torque
wrench if needed.
OPEN VALVE STEMS GENTLY
When opening valve stems, turn the hexagonal
wrench until it hits against the stopper. Do not
try to force the valve to open further.
Note on Adding Refrigerant
ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT PER PIPE LENGTH
Connective Pipe
Length (m)
Air Purging
Method Additional Refrigerant
< Standard pipe length Vacuum Pump N/A
> Standard pipe
length
Vacuum Pump
Liquid Side: Ø 6.35 (ø 0.25”)
R32:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 12g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.13oZ/ft
R290: R290:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 10g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.10oZ/ft
Liquid Side: Ø 9.52 (ø 0.375”)
R32:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 24g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.26oZ/ft
(Pipe length – standard length) x 18g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.19oZ/ft
Fig. 6.2
Some systems require additional charging depending on pipe lengths. The standard pipe length varies
according to local regulations. For example, in North America, the standard pipe length is 7.5m (25’).
In other areas, the standard pipe length is 5m (16‘). The refrigerant should be charged from the
service port
on the outdoor unit’s low pressure valve.
The additional refrigerant to be charged can be
calculated using the following formula:
R410A: R410A:
(Pipe length – standard length) x 15g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.16oZ/ft
(Pipe length – standard length) x 30g/m
(Pipe length – standard length) x 0.32oZ/ft
Page 31
Electrical and Gas Leak Checks 8
Electrical Safety Checks
After installation, conrm that all electrical wiring
is installed in accordance with local and national
regulations, and according to the Installation
Manual.
BEFORE TEST RUN
Check Grounding Work
Measure grounding resistance by visual detection
and with grounding resistance tester. Grounding
resistance must be less than 0.1Ω.
Note: This may not be required for some
locations in the US.
DURING TEST RUN
Check for Electrical Leakage
During the Test Run, use an electroprobe and
multimeter to perform a comprehensive electrical
leakage test.
If electrical leakage is detected, turn off the unit
immediately and call a licensed electrician to nd
and resolve the cause of the leakage.
Note: This may not be required for some
locations in the US.
Gas Leak Checks
There are two different methods to check for gas
leaks.
Soap and Water Method
Using a soft brush, apply soapy water or liquid
detergent to all pipe connection points on the
indoor unit and outdoor unit. The presence of
bubbles indicates a leak.
Leak Detector Method
If using leak detector, refer to the device’s
operation manual for proper usage instructions.
AFTER PERFORMING GAS LEAK CHECKS
After conrming that the all pipe connection
points DO NOT leak, replace the valve cover on
the outside unit.
WARNING – RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK
ALL WIRING MUST COMPLY WITH LOCAL
AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODES,
AND MUST BE INSTALLED BY A LICENSED
ELECTRICIAN.
Page 32
Test Run 9
Before Test Run
Only perform test run after you have completed
the following steps:
Electrical Safety Checks – Conrm that
the unit’s electrical system is safe and
operating properly
Gas Leak Checks – Check all are nut
connections and conrm that the system is
not leaking
Conrm that gas and liquid (high and low
pressure) valves are fully open
Test Run Instructions
You should perform the Test Run for at least 30
minutes.
1.
Connect power to the unit.
2.
Press the ON/OFF button on the remote
controller to turn it on.
3.
Press the MODE button to scroll through the
following functions, one at a time:
COOL – Select lowest possible temperature
HEAT – Select highest possible temperature
4.
Let each function run for 5 minutes, and
perform the following checks:
List of Checks to Perform PASS/FAIL
No electrical leakage
Unit is properly grounded
All electrical terminals
properly covered
Indoor and outdoor units
are solidly installed
All pipe connection
points do not leak
Outdoor
(2):
Indoor
(2):
Water drains properly
from drain hose
All piping is properly
insulated
Unit performs COOL
function properly
Unit performs HEAT
function properly
Indoor unit louvers
rotate properly
Indoor unit responds to
remote controller
Page 32
Test Run 9
Before Test Run
Only perform test run after you have completed
the following steps:
Electrical Safety Checks – Conrm that
the unit’s electrical system is safe and
operating properly
Gas Leak Checks – Check all are nut
connections and conrm that the system is
not leaking
Conrm that gas and liquid (high and low
pressure) valves are fully open
Test Run Instructions
You should perform the Test Run for at least 30
minutes.
1.
Connect power to the unit.
2.
Press the ON/OFF button on the remote
controller to turn it on.
3.
Press the MODE button to scroll through the
following functions, one at a time:
COOL – Select lowest possible temperature
HEAT – Select highest possible temperature
4.
Let each function run for 5 minutes, and
perform the following checks:
List of Checks to Perform PASS/FAIL
No electrical leakage
Unit is properly grounded
All electrical terminals
properly covered
Indoor and outdoor units
are solidly installed
All pipe connection
points do not leak
Outdoor
(2):
Indoor
(2):
Water drains properly
from drain hose
All piping is properly
insulated
Unit performs COOL
function properly
Unit performs HEAT
function properly
Indoor unit louvers
rotate properly
Indoor unit responds to
remote controller
Page 33
DOUBLE-CHECK PIPE CONNECTIONS
During operation, the pressure of the
refrigerant circuit will increase. This may
reveal leaks that were not present during your
initial leak check. Take time during the Test
Run to double-check that all refrigerant pipe
connection points do not have leaks. Refer to
Gas Leak Check section for instructions.
5.
After the Test Run is successfully completed,
and you conrm that all checks points in List
of Checks to Perform have PASSED, do the
following:
a.
Using remote control, return unit to
normal operating temperature.
b.
Using insulation tape, wrap the indoor
refrigerant pipe connections that you
left uncovered during the indoor unit
installation process.
IF AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 17°C
(63°F)
You can’t use the remote controller to turn
on the COOL function when the ambient
temperature is below 17°C. In this instance,
you can use the MANUAL CONTROL button
to test the COOL function.
1.
Lift the front panel of the indoor unit, and
raise it until it clicks in place.
2.
The MANUAL CONTROL button is located
on the right-hand side of the unit. Press it 2
times to select the COOL function. See
Fig.8.1
.
3.
Perform Test Run as normal.
Fig. 8.1
Manual control button
Page 34
European Disposal Guidelines 10
This appliance contains refrigerant and other potentially hazardous materials. When disposing of
this appliance, the law requires special collection and treatment. Do not dispose of this product as
household waste or unsorted municipal waste.
When disposing of this appliance, you have the following options:
Dispose of the appliance at designated municipal electronic waste collection facility.
When buying a new appliance, the retailer will take back the old appliance free of charge.
The manufacturer will take back the old appliance free of charge.
Sell the appliance to certied scrap metal dealers.
Special notice
Disposing of this appliance in the forest or other natural surroundings endangers your health and is
bad for the environment. Hazardous substances may leak into the ground water and enter the food
chain.
Page 34
European Disposal Guidelines 10
This appliance contains refrigerant and other potentially hazardous materials. When disposing of
this appliance, the law requires special collection and treatment. Do not dispose of this product as
household waste or unsorted municipal waste.
When disposing of this appliance, you have the following options:
Dispose of the appliance at designated municipal electronic waste collection facility.
When buying a new appliance, the retailer will take back the old appliance free of charge.
The manufacturer will take back the old appliance free of charge.
Sell the appliance to certied scrap metal dealers.
Special notice
Disposing of this appliance in the forest or other natural surroundings endangers your health and is
bad for the environment. Hazardous substances may leak into the ground water and enter the food
chain.
Page 35
11
1. Checks to the area
3. General work area
4. Checking for presence of refrigerant
5. Presence of re extinguisher
If any hot work is to be conducted on the refrigeration equipment or any associated parts, appropriate
re extinguishing equipment shall be available to hand. Have a dry power or CO2 re extinguisher
adjacent to the charging area.
7. Ventilated area
Ensure that the area is in the open or that it it adequately ventilated before breaking into the system
or conducting any hot work. A degree of ventilation shall continue during the period that the work is
carried out. The ventilation should safely disperse any released refrigerant and preferably expel it
externally into the atmosphere.
8. Checks to the refrigeration equipment
Where electrical components are being changed, they shall be t for the purpose and to the correct
specication. At all times the manufacturer s maintenance and service guidelines shall be followed.
If in doubt consult the manufacturer s technical department for assistance. The following checks shall
be applied to installations using ammable refrigerants:
6. No ignition sources
No person carrying out work in relation to a refrigeration system which involves exposing any pipe
work that contains or has contained ammable refrigerant shall use any sources of ignition in such a
manner that it may lead to the risk of re or explosion. All possible ignition sources, including cigarette
smoking, should be kept sufciently far away from the site of installation, repairing, removing and
disposal, during which ammable refrigerant can possibly be released to the surrounding space. Prior
to work taking place, the area around the equipment is to be surveyed to make sure that there are
no ammable hazards or ignition risks. NO SMOKING signs shall be displayed.
2. Work procedure
All mintenance staff and others working in the local area shall be instructed on the nature of work
being carried out. work in conned sapces shall be avoided. The area around the work space shall
be sectioned off. Ensure that the conditions within the area have been made safe by control of
ammable material.
Prior to beginning work on systems containing ammable refrigerants, safety checks are necessary
to ensure that the risk of ignition is minimised. For repair to the refrigerating system, the following
precautions shall be complied with prior to conducting work on the system.
Works shall be undertaken under a controlled procedure so as to minimise the risk of a
ammable gas or vapour being present while the work is being performed.
The area shall be checked with an appropriate refrigerant detector prior to and during work,
to ensure the technician is aware of potentially ammable atmospheres. Ensure that the leak
detection equipment being used is suitable for use with ammable refrigerants, i.e. no sparking,
adequately sealed or intrinsically safe.
,,
,,
,
,
Information Servicing
(Required for the units adopt R32/R290 Refrigerant only)
Page 36
,
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
9. Checks to electrical devices
10. Repairs to sealed components
the charge size is in accordance with the room size within which the refrigerant containing
parts are installed;
the ventilation machinery and outlets are operating adequately and are not obstructed;
if an indirect refrigerating circuit is being used, the secondary circuits shall be checked
for the presence of refrigerant; marking to the equipment continues to be visible and
legible.
marking and signs that are illegible shall be corrected;
refrigeration pipe or components are installed in a position where they are unlikely to be
exposed to any substance which may corrode refrigerant containing components, unless
the components are constructed of materials which are inherently resistant to being
corroded or are suitably protected against being so corroded.
Repair and maintenance to electrical components shall include initial safety checks and
component inspection procedures. If a fault exists that could compromise safety, then no
electrical supply shall be connected to the circuit until it is satisfactorily dealt with. If the fault
cannot be corrected immediately but it is necessary to continue operation, and adequate
temporary solution shall be used. This shall be reported to the owner of the equipment so all
parties are advised.
Initial safety checks shall include:
that capacitors are discharged: this shall be done in a safe manner to avoid possibility of
sparking
that there no live electrical components and wiring are exposed while charging, recovering
or purging the system;
that there is continuity of earth bonding.
10.1 During repairs to sealed components, all electrical supplies shall be disconnected from the
equipment being worked upon prior to any removal of sealed covers, etc. If it is absolutely
necessary to have an electrical supply to equipment during servicing, then a permanently
operating form of leak detection shall be located at the most critical point to warn of a
potentially hazardous situation.
10.2 Particular attention shall be paid to the following to ensure that by working on electrical
components, the casing is not altered in such a way that the level of protection is affected.
This shall include damage to cables, excessive number of connections, terminals not made
to original specication, damage to seals, incorrect tting of glands, etc.
Ensure that apparatus is mounted securely.
Ensure that seals or sealing materials have not degraded such that they no longer serve
the purpose of preventing the ingress of ammable atmospheres. Replacement parts shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer s specications.
NOTE: The use of silicon sealant may inhibit the effectiveness of some types of leak detection
equipment. Instrinsically safe components do not have to be isolated prior to working on them.
Page 37
l
l
l
l
l
11. Repair to intrinsically safe components
Do not apply any permanent inductive or capacitance loads to the circuit without ensuring
that this will not exceed the permissible voltage and current permitted for the equipment in
use. Intrinscially safe components are the only types that can be worked on while live in the
presence of a ammable atmosphere. The test apparatus shall be at the correct rating.
Replace components only with parts specied by the manufacturer. Other parts may result
in the ignition of refrigerant in the atmosphere from a leak.
12. Cabling
Check that cabling will not be subject to wear, corrosion, excessive pressure, vibration, sharp
edges or any other adverse environmental effects. The check shall also take into account the
effects of aging or continual vibration from sources such as compressors or fans.
15. Removal and evacuation
When breaking into the refrigerant circuit to make repairs of for any other purpose
conventional procedures shall be used, However, it is important that best practice is followed
since ammability is a consideration. The following procedure shall be adhered to:
remove refrigerant;
purge the circuit with inert gas;
evacuate;
purge again with inert gas;
open the circuit by cutting or brazing.
The refrigerant charge shall be recovered into the correct recovery cylinders. The system shall be
ushed with OFN to render the unit safe. This process may need to be repeated several times.
Compressed air or oxygen shall not be used for this task.
Flushing shall be achieved by breaking the vacuum in the system with OFN and continuing to
ll until the working pressure is achieved, then venting to atmosphere, and nally pulling down
to a vacuum. This process shall be repeated until no refrigerant is within the system.
13. Detection of ammable refrigerants
Under no circumstances shall potential sources of ignition be used in the searching for or
detection of refrigerant leaks. A halide torch(or any other detector using a naked ame)
shall not be used.
14. Leak detection methods
The following leak detection methods are deemed acceptable for systems containing ammable
refrigerants. Electronic leak detectors shall be used to detect ammable refrigerants, but the
sensitivity may not be adequate, or may need re-calibration.(Detection equipment shall be
calibrated in a refrigerant-free area.) Ensure that the detector is not a potential source of ignition
and is suitable for the refrigerant. Leak detection equipment shall be set at a percentage of the
LFL of the refrigerant and shall be calibrated to the refrigerant employed and the appropriate
percentage of gas (25% maximum) is conrmed. Leak detection uids are suitable for use with
most refrigerants but the use of detergents containing chlorine shall be avoided as the chlorine
may react with the refrigerant and corrode the copper pipe-work.
If a leak is suspected ,all naked ames shall be removed or extinguished. If a leakage of refrigernat
is found which requires brazing, all of the refrigerant shall be recovered from the system, or
isolated(by means of shut off valves) in a part of the system remote from the leak . Oxygen free
nitrogen(OFN) shall then be purged through the system both before and during the brazing process.
Page 38
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
17. Decommissioning
Before carrying out this procedure, it is essential that the technician is completely familiar
with the equipment and all its detail. It is recommended good practice that all refrigerants
are recovered safely. Prior to the task being carried out, an oil and refrigerant sample shall
be taken.
In case analysis is required prior to re-use of reclaimed refrigerant. It is essential that
electrical power is available before the task is commenced.
a) Become familiar with the equipment and its operation.
b) Isolate system electrically
c) Before attempting the procedure ensure that:
mechanical handling equipment is available, if required, for handling refrigerant cylinders;
all personal protetive equipment is available and being used correctly;
the recovery process is supervised at all times by a competent person;
recovery equipment and cylinders conform to the appropriate standards.
d) Pump down refrigerant system, if possible.
e) If a vacuum is not possible, make a manifold so that refrigerant can be removed from
various parts of the system.
f) Make sure that cylinder is situated on the scales before recovery takes place.
g) Start the recovery machine and operate in accordance with manufacturer s instructions.
h) Do not overll cylinders. (No more than 80% volume liquid charge).
i) Do not exceed the maximum working pressure of the cylinder, even temporarily.
j) When the cylinders have been lled correctly and the process completed, make sure that
the cylinders and the equipment are removed from site promptly and all isolation valves
on the equipment are closed off.
k) Recovered refrigerant shall not be charged into another refrigeration system unless it has
been cleaned and checked.
16. Charging procedures
In addition to conventional charging procedures, the following requirements shall be followed:
Ensure that contamination of different refrigerants does not occur when using charging
equipment. Hoses or lines shall be as short as possible to minimize the amount of
refrigerant contained in them.
Cylinders shall be kept upright.
Ensure that the refrigeration system is earthed prior to charging the system with refrigerant.
Label the system when charging is complete(if not already).
Extreme care shall be taken not to overll the refrigeration system.
Prior to recharging the system it shall be pressure tested with OFN. The system shall be
leak tested on completion of charging but prior to commissioning. A follow up leak test
shall be carried out prior to leaving the site.
,
When the nal OFN charge is used, the system shall be vented down to atmospheric pressure
to enable work to take place. This operation is absolutely vital if brazing operations on the
pipe-work are to take place.
Ensure that the outlet for the vacuum pump is not closed to any ignition sources and there
is ventilation available.
Page 38
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
17. Decommissioning
Before carrying out this procedure, it is essential that the technician is completely familiar
with the equipment and all its detail. It is recommended good practice that all refrigerants
are recovered safely. Prior to the task being carried out, an oil and refrigerant sample shall
be taken.
In case analysis is required prior to re-use of reclaimed refrigerant. It is essential that
electrical power is available before the task is commenced.
a) Become familiar with the equipment and its operation.
b) Isolate system electrically
c) Before attempting the procedure ensure that:
mechanical handling equipment is available, if required, for handling refrigerant cylinders;
all personal protetive equipment is available and being used correctly;
the recovery process is supervised at all times by a competent person;
recovery equipment and cylinders conform to the appropriate standards.
d) Pump down refrigerant system, if possible.
e) If a vacuum is not possible, make a manifold so that refrigerant can be removed from
various parts of the system.
f) Make sure that cylinder is situated on the scales before recovery takes place.
g) Start the recovery machine and operate in accordance with manufacturer s instructions.
h) Do not overll cylinders. (No more than 80% volume liquid charge).
i) Do not exceed the maximum working pressure of the cylinder, even temporarily.
j) When the cylinders have been lled correctly and the process completed, make sure that
the cylinders and the equipment are removed from site promptly and all isolation valves
on the equipment are closed off.
k) Recovered refrigerant shall not be charged into another refrigeration system unless it has
been cleaned and checked.
16. Charging procedures
In addition to conventional charging procedures, the following requirements shall be followed:
Ensure that contamination of different refrigerants does not occur when using charging
equipment. Hoses or lines shall be as short as possible to minimize the amount of
refrigerant contained in them.
Cylinders shall be kept upright.
Ensure that the refrigeration system is earthed prior to charging the system with refrigerant.
Label the system when charging is complete(if not already).
Extreme care shall be taken not to overll the refrigeration system.
Prior to recharging the system it shall be pressure tested with OFN. The system shall be
leak tested on completion of charging but prior to commissioning. A follow up leak test
shall be carried out prior to leaving the site.
,
When the nal OFN charge is used, the system shall be vented down to atmospheric pressure
to enable work to take place. This operation is absolutely vital if brazing operations on the
pipe-work are to take place.
Ensure that the outlet for the vacuum pump is not closed to any ignition sources and there
is ventilation available.
Page 39
1. Transport of equipment containing ammable refrigerants
Compliance with the transport regulations
2. Marking of equipment using signs
Compliance with local regulations
3. Disposal of equipment using ammable refrigerants
Compliance with national regulations
4. Storage of equipment/appliances
The storage of equipment should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Storage of packed (unsold) equipment
Storage package protection should be constructed such that mechanical damage to the
equipment inside the package will not cause a leak of the refrigerant charge.
The maximum number of pieces of equipment permitted to be stored together will be
determined by local regulations.
20. Transportation, marking and storage for units
18. Labelling
Equipment shall be labelled stating that it has been de-commissioned and emptied of
refrigerant. The label shall be dated and signed. Ensure that there are labels on the
equipment stating the equipment contains ammable refrigerant.
19. Recovery
When removing refrigerant from a system, either for service or decommissioning, it is
recommended good practice that all refrigerants are removed safely.
When tranferring refrigerant into cylinders, ensure that only appropriate refrigerant
recovery cylinders are employed. Ensure that the correct numbers of cylinders for holding
the total system charge are available. All cylinders to be used are designated for the
recovered refrigerant and labelled for that refrigerant(i.e special cylinders for the
recovery of refrigerant). Cylinders shall be complete with pressure relief valve and
associated shut-off valves in good working order.
Empty recovery cylinders are evacuated and, if possible, cooled before recovery occurs.
The recovery equipment shall be in good working order with a set of instructions
concerning the equipment that is at hand and shall be suitable for the recovery of
ammable refrigerants. In addition, a set of calibrated weighing scales shall be available
and in good working order.
Hoses shall be complete with leak-free disconnect couplings and in good condition. Before
using the recovery machine, check that it is in satisfactory working order, has been
properly maintained and that any associated electrical components are sealed to prevent
ignition in the event of a refrigerant release. Consult manufacturer if in doubt.
The recovered refrigerant shall be returned to the refrigerant supplier in the correct
recovery cylinder, and the relevant Waste Transfer Note arranged. Do not mix refrigerants
in recovery units and especially not in cylinders.
If compressors or compressor oils are to be removed, ensure that they have been
evacuated to an acceptable level to make certain that ammable refrigerant does not
remain within the lubricant. The evacuation process shall be carried out prior to retruning
the compressor to the suppliers. Only electric heating to the compressor body shall be
employed to accelerate this process. When oil is drained from a system, it shall be carried
out safely.
All the pictures in the manual are for explanatory purposes only. The actual shape of the unit
you purchased may be slightly dierent, but the operations and functions are the same.
The company may not be held responsible for any misprinted information. The design and
the specications of the product for reasons, such as product improvement, are subject to
change without any prior notice.
Please consult with the manufacturer at +30 211 300 3300 or with the Sales agency for further
details. Any future updates to the manual will be uploaded to the service website, and it is
advised to always check for the latest version.
Scan here to download the latest version of this manual.
www.inventorairconditioner.com/media-library
Πίνακας Περιεχομένων
Eγχειρίδιο Εγκατάστασης
Εγκατάσταση Εσωτερικής
Μονάδας.............................. 11
Εγκατάσταση Εξωτερικής
Μονάδας.............................. 20
Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας......................... 4
0
1
5
Εξαρτήματα....................................... 6
2
4
Componente aparat........................ 10
3
Περίληψη εγκατάστασης
- Εσωτερική μονάδα ........................8
1. Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης .............................. 20
2. Εγκαταστήστε τον σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης .......... 21
3. Στερεώστε την εξωτερική μονάδα ................................ 22
4. Συνδέστε τα καλώδια ρεύματος και σήματος ............ 23
1. Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης .......... 11
2. Προσαρµόστε την επιτοίχια βάση ................12
3. Ανοίξτε τρύπα στον τοίχο για τη σύνδεση του αγωγού 12
4. Προετοιµάστε τη σωλήνα του ψυκτικού µέσου 14
5. Ενώστε τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης ............15
6. Ενώστε το καλώδιο σήµατος ......................16
7. Τυλίξτε καλώδια και αγωγούς .......................18
8. Εκκινήστε την εσωτερική µονάδα .............18
Πίνακας Περιεχομένων
Eγχειρίδιο Εγκατάστασης
Εγκατάσταση Εσωτερικής
Μονάδας.............................. 11
Εγκατάσταση Εξωτερικής
Μονάδας.............................. 20
Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας......................... 4
0
1
5
Εξαρτήματα....................................... 6
2
4
Componente aparat........................ 10
3
Περίληψη εγκατάστασης
- Εσωτερική μονάδα ........................8
1. Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης .............................. 20
2. Εγκαταστήστε τον σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης .......... 21
3. Στερεώστε την εξωτερική μονάδα ................................ 22
4. Συνδέστε τα καλώδια ρεύματος και σήματος ............ 23
1. Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης .......... 11
2. Προσαρµόστε την επιτοίχια βάση ................12
3. Ανοίξτε τρύπα στον τοίχο για τη σύνδεση του αγωγού 12
4. Προετοιµάστε τη σωλήνα του ψυκτικού µέσου 14
5. Ενώστε τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης ............15
6. Ενώστε το καλώδιο σήµατος ......................16
7. Τυλίξτε καλώδια και αγωγούς .......................18
8. Εκκινήστε την εσωτερική µονάδα .............18
Σύνδεση Αγωγού Ψυκτικού Μέσου ...25
Εκκένωση Αέρα..................... 29
6
7
8
9
10
Πληροφορίες Επισκευής .................................. 34
11
MC MC
Προσοχή: Κίνδυνος πυρκαγιάς
(αφορά τα μοντέλα με ψυκτικό υγρό R32/R290)
Έλεγχος για ηλεκτρολογική διαρροή
και διαρροή αερίο .............................................. 31
Δοκιμαστική εκκίνηση ...................................... 32
Ευρωπαϊκές Οδηγίες Απόρριψης .................... 34
1. Οδηγίες εκκένωσης......................................................29
2. Σημείωση για προσθήκη ψυκτικού μέσου .......... 30
Α. Σηµείωση σχετικά µε το µήκος αγωγού ..........................25
B. Οδηγίες Σύνδεσης- Αγωγός Ψυκτικού Μέσου ...............25
1. Κόψτε τον Αγωγό ............................................. 25
2. Αφαιρέστε τα γρέζια ........................................ 26
3. Ενώστε τις άκρες των αγωγών ...................................... 26
4. Συνδέστε τους αγωγούς.................................................. 27
Σελίδα 4
Page 4
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας
Διαβάστε τις Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας πριν την εγκατάσταση
Εσφαλμένη εγκατάσταση λόγω αγνόησης των οδηγιών μπορεί να προκαλέσει σοβαρές καταστροφές ή τραυματισμούς.
Η σοβαρότητα των πιθανών καταστροφών ή τραυματισμών εμφανίζεται ως ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ή ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι αγνοώντας τις οδηγίες μπορεί να προκληθεί θάνατος ή σοβαρός
τραυματισμός.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι αγνοώντας τις οδηγίες μπορεί να προκληθεί κάποιος τραυματισμός
τόσο στον ίδιο τον άνθρωπο όσο και καταστροφές στη συσκευή ή σε άλλη ιδιοκτησία.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι δεν πρέπει ποτέ να πραγματοποιείτε την λειτουργία που δείχνει.
ΜΗΝ παραποιείτε το μήκος του καλωδίου ρεύματος και μην χρησιμοποιείτε πολύπριζα.
ΜΗΝ τοποθετείτε και άλλες συσκευές στην ίδια πρίζα. Λανθασμένη και μη αποτελεσματική παροχή
ρεύματος μπορεί να προκαλέσει φωτιά ή ηλεκτροπληξία.
Όταν συνδέετε με τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου, μην αφήνετε ουσίες ή αέρια πέραν όσων
ενδείκνυνται να εισέλθουν στη μονάδα. Η παρουσία άλλων αερίων ή ουσιών θα μειώσει την ισχύ
και μπορεί να προκαλέσει ασυνήθιστη υψηλή πίεση στον ψυκτικό κύκλο. Αυτό μπορεί να φέρει
έκκρηξη και τραυματισμό.
ΜΗΝ αφήνετε τα παιδιά να παίξουν με το κλιματιστικό. Τα παιδιά πρέπει να επιβλέπονται
αναφορικά με τη μονάδα κάθε στιγμή.
1. Η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται από εξουσιοδοτημένο προμηθευτή ή ειδικό.
Αναποτελεσματική εγκατάσταση μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροές νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά.
2. Η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται σύμφωνα με τις οδηγίες εγκατάστασης. Εσφαλμένη
εγκατάσταση μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά. (Στην Βόρεια Αμερική,
η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές της ΝΕC και CΕC από
εξουσιοδοτημένο προσωπικό και μόνο).
3. Επικοινωνήστε με εξουσιοδοτημένο κέντρο σέρβις για επισκευή ή συντήρηση της μονάδας.
4. Χρησιμοποιήστε μόνο τα συμπεριλαμβανόμενα εξαρτήματα, μέρη και ειδικά στοιχεία για
εγκατάσταση. Η χρήση άλλων εξαρτημάτων μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία,
φωτιά καθώς και καταστροφή της μονάδας.
5. Εγκαταστήστε τη μονάδα σε τοποθεσία που μπορεί να υποστηρίξει το βάρος της μονάδας καθώς
αν δεν γίνει η εγκατάσταση σωστά, η μονάδα μπορεί να πέσει και να προκαλέσει σοβαρούς
τραυματισμούς και καταστροφές.
6. Μην χρησιμοποιείτε άλλα μέσα για να επισπεύσετε τη διαδικασία απόψυξης ή καθαρισμού, εκτός
όσων συστήνονται από τον κατασκευαστή.
7. Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να τοποθετείται σε χώρους όπου δεν υπάρχουν εύφλεκτα στοιχεία όπως
για παράδειγμα πηγές θερμότητας, συσκευές αερίου ή θερμαντικά σώματα.
8. Μην αποσυναρμολογείτε την μονάδα και μην τροποποιείτε το ψυκτικό κύκλωμα.
9. Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να εγκαθίσταται σε χώρους με επαρκή εξαερισμό και σε μέρη που το
μέγεθος τους μπορεί να υποστηρίξει τη λειτουργία αυτής της μονάδας.
10. Το ψυκτικό υγρό με το οποίο λειτουργεί η μονάδα, είναι άοσμο.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: 7 στα 10 κλιματιστικά υποχρεούνται να υιοθετήσουν ψυκτικό υγρό R32/R290.
Σελίδα 5
Page 4
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας
Διαβάστε τις Οδηγίες Ασφαλείας πριν την εγκατάσταση
Εσφαλμένη εγκατάσταση λόγω αγνόησης των οδηγιών μπορεί να προκαλέσει σοβαρές καταστροφές ή τραυματισμούς.
Η σοβαρότητα των πιθανών καταστροφών ή τραυματισμών εμφανίζεται ως ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ή ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι αγνοώντας τις οδηγίες μπορεί να προκληθεί θάνατος ή σοβαρός
τραυματισμός.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι αγνοώντας τις οδηγίες μπορεί να προκληθεί κάποιος τραυματισμός
τόσο στον ίδιο τον άνθρωπο όσο και καταστροφές στη συσκευή ή σε άλλη ιδιοκτησία.
Αυτό το σύμβολο δείχνει ότι δεν πρέπει ποτέ να πραγματοποιείτε την λειτουργία που δείχνει.
ΜΗΝ παραποιείτε το μήκος του καλωδίου ρεύματος και μην χρησιμοποιείτε πολύπριζα.
ΜΗΝ τοποθετείτε και άλλες συσκευές στην ίδια πρίζα. Λανθασμένη και μη αποτελεσματική παροχή
ρεύματος μπορεί να προκαλέσει φωτιά ή ηλεκτροπληξία.
Όταν συνδέετε με τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου, μην αφήνετε ουσίες ή αέρια πέραν όσων
ενδείκνυνται να εισέλθουν στη μονάδα. Η παρουσία άλλων αερίων ή ουσιών θα μειώσει την ισχύ
και μπορεί να προκαλέσει ασυνήθιστη υψηλή πίεση στον ψυκτικό κύκλο. Αυτό μπορεί να φέρει
έκκρηξη και τραυματισμό.
ΜΗΝ αφήνετε τα παιδιά να παίξουν με το κλιματιστικό. Τα παιδιά πρέπει να επιβλέπονται
αναφορικά με τη μονάδα κάθε στιγμή.
1. Η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται από εξουσιοδοτημένο προμηθευτή ή ειδικό.
Αναποτελεσματική εγκατάσταση μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροές νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά.
2. Η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται σύμφωνα με τις οδηγίες εγκατάστασης. Εσφαλμένη
εγκατάσταση μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά. (Στην Βόρεια Αμερική,
η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές της ΝΕC και CΕC από
εξουσιοδοτημένο προσωπικό και μόνο).
3. Επικοινωνήστε με εξουσιοδοτημένο κέντρο σέρβις για επισκευή ή συντήρηση της μονάδας.
4. Χρησιμοποιήστε μόνο τα συμπεριλαμβανόμενα εξαρτήματα, μέρη και ειδικά στοιχεία για
εγκατάσταση. Η χρήση άλλων εξαρτημάτων μπορεί να προκαλέσει διαρροή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία,
φωτιά καθώς και καταστροφή της μονάδας.
5. Εγκαταστήστε τη μονάδα σε τοποθεσία που μπορεί να υποστηρίξει το βάρος της μονάδας καθώς
αν δεν γίνει η εγκατάσταση σωστά, η μονάδα μπορεί να πέσει και να προκαλέσει σοβαρούς
τραυματισμούς και καταστροφές.
6. Μην χρησιμοποιείτε άλλα μέσα για να επισπεύσετε τη διαδικασία απόψυξης ή καθαρισμού, εκτός
όσων συστήνονται από τον κατασκευαστή.
7. Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να τοποθετείται σε χώρους όπου δεν υπάρχουν εύφλεκτα στοιχεία όπως
για παράδειγμα πηγές θερμότητας, συσκευές αερίου ή θερμαντικά σώματα.
8. Μην αποσυναρμολογείτε την μονάδα και μην τροποποιείτε το ψυκτικό κύκλωμα.
9. Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να εγκαθίσταται σε χώρους με επαρκή εξαερισμό και σε μέρη που το
μέγεθος τους μπορεί να υποστηρίξει τη λειτουργία αυτής της μονάδας.
10. Το ψυκτικό υγρό με το οποίο λειτουργεί η μονάδα, είναι άοσμο.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: 7 στα 10 κλιματιστικά υποχρεούνται να υιοθετήσουν ψυκτικό υγρό R32/R290.
Page 5
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
Σημείωση σχετικά με Φθοριούχα Αέρια
11. Για ηλεκτρολογικές διεργασίες, ακολουθήστε τις τοπικές και εθνικές ηλεκτρολογικές προδιαγραφές,
νόμους και εγχειρίδια εγκατάστασης. Θα πρέπει να χρησιμποιείτε ανεξάρτητο κύκλωμα τροφοδοσίας με ρεύμα
και ξεχωριστή πρίζα. Μην συνδέετε άλλες συσκευές στην ίδια πρίζα. Αναποτελεσματική παροχή ρεύματος ή
σφάλματα στην ηλεκτρολογική σύνδεση μπορεί να προκαλέσουν φωτιά καθώς και ηλεκτροπληξία.
12. Για ηλεκτρολογικές διεργασίες, χρησιμοποιήστε ειδικά καλώδια. Ενώστε τα καλώδια σφιχτά και σφίξτε τα
με απόλυτη ασφάλεια ώστε να εμποδίσετε εξωτερικούς παράγοντες να προκαλέσουν καταστροφές.
Εσφαλμένη ηλεκτρολογική σύνδεση μπορεί να προκαλέσει υπερθέρμανση, φωτιά και ηλεκτροπληξία.
13. Όλα τα καλώδια θα πρέπει να είναι σωστά τοποθετημένα ώστε να διασφαλίζεται το σωστό κλείσιμο του
πίνακα ελέγχου. Αν δεν έχει γινεί σωστό κλείσιμο του πίνακα ελέγχου, μπορεί να οδηγήσει σε διάβρωση,
υπερθέρμανση, φωτιά και ηλεκτροπληξία.
14. Σε συγκεκριμένα περιβάλλοντα λειτουργίας, όπως κουζίνες, δωμάτια σερβιρίσματος κλπ, συνιστάται η
χρήση ειδικών κλιματιστικών μονάδων.
15. Αν το καλώδιο τροφοδοσίας έχει φθαρεί, θα πρέπει να αντικατασταθεί αμέσως από τον κατασκευαστή ή
από αδειοδοτημένο τεχνικό, ώστε να αποφευχθούν πιθανά ατυχήματα.
16. ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΤΡΕΠΕΤΕ σε παιδιά κάτω των 8 ετών να χρησιμοποιούν αυτή τη συσκευή. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι, τα
παιδιά και τα άτομα με ειδικές ανάγκες ή με έλλειψη γνώσης και εμπειρίας, επιβλέπονται από άτομα υπεύθυνα
για την ασφάλειά τους και δεν αναλαμβάνουν διαδικασίες όπως τον καθαρισμό ή τη συντήρηση της συσκευής.
Τα παιδιά θα πρέπει πάντοτε να επιβλέπονται ώστε να μην παίζουν με τη συσκευή.
Γ ια μονάδες που έχουν βοηθητικά θερμαντικά σώματα, ΜΗΝ εγκαθιστάτε τη μονάδα σε λιγότερο από 1
μέτρο (3 πόδια) απόσταση από εύφλεκτα υλικά.
ΜΗΝ εγκαθιστάτε τη μονάδα σε περιοχή που μπορεί να υπάρξει διαρροή εύφλεκτου αερίου.
Αν μαζευτεί γύρω από τη μονάδα εύφλεκτο υλικό, μπορεί να προκληθεί φωτιά.
ΜΗΝ λειτουργείτε τη μονάδα σε υγρό περιβάλλον όπως μπάνιο ή δωμάτιο μπουγάδας.
Η υπερβολική έκθεση σε νερό μπορεί να προκαλέσει βραχυκύκλωμα στα ηλεκτρολογικά μέρη.
1. Το προϊόν πρέπει να είναι σωστά εδραιωμένο τη στιγμή της εγκατάστασης αλλιώς μπορεί να προκληθεί
ηλεκτροπληξία.
2. Εγκαταστήστε αγωγό αποστράγγισης σύμφωνα με τις οδηγίες στο εγχειρίδιο. Εσφαλμένη αποστράγγιση
μπορεί να προκαλέσει καταστροφές στο σπίτι και την ιδιοκτησία σας.
3. Το κλιματιστικό θα πρέπει να τοποθετείται με τέτοιο τρόπο που να εξασφαλίζεται η σωστή λειτουργία του,
προς αποφυγή δυσλειτουργιών.
4. Το άτομο που θα εμπλακεί με την επισκευή ή συντήρηση του κλιματιστικού και θα παρέμβει στο ψυκτικό
κύκλωμα θα πρέπει να φέρει όλα τα απαραίτητα πιστοποιητικά που ορίζουν την αδειοδότηση του ατόμου, ως
ψυκτικού.
1. Το κλιματιστικό εμπεριέχει φθοριούχα αέρια. Για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τον τύπο του
αερίου και την ποσότητα, παρακαλείσθε να ανατρέξετε στο σχετικό ταμπελάκι της μονάδας.
2. Η εγκατάσταση, η συντήρηση και η επισκευή του πρέπει να πραγματοποιούνται από εξειδικευμένο τεχνικό.
3. Η απεγκατάσταση του προϊόντος και η ανακύκλωσή του πρέπει να πραγματοποιούνται από εξειδικευμένο
τεχνικό.
4. Αν υπάρχει εγκατεστημένο σύστημα ελέγχου διαρροών, θα πρέπει να ελέγχεται κάθε 12 μήνες για διαρροή.
5. Όταν ελεχθεί η μονάδα για διαρροή, συνιστάται η καταγραφή του ιστορικού ελέγχων.
Σελίδα 6
Όνομα
Σχήμα Ποσότητα
1
1
1
1
Εξαρτήματα
5
5
2
1
2
Page 6
Η κλιματιστική μονάδα παρέχεται με τα ακόλουθα εξαρτήματα. Χρησιμοποιήστε όλα τα μέρη εγκατάστασης και τα
εξαρτήματα ώστε να εγκαταστήσετε το κλιματιστικό. Εσφαλμένη εγκατάσταση μπορεί να έχει ως αποτέλεσμα
διαροοή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία και φωτιά, ή καταστροφές στο προϊόν.
Επιτοίχια βάση
Ούπα
Αυτοδιάτρητη βίδα ST3.9 X 25
Ασύρματο τηλεχειριστήριο
Βάση Ασύρματου
τηλεχειριστηρίου
Πώμα
Σύνδεσμος αποστράγγισης
Mπαταρίες ξηρού τύπου
ΑΑΑ LR03
Προαιρετικά
Μέρη
(Για μοντέλα ψύξης &
θέρμανσης μόνο)
Αυτοδιάτρητοη Βίδα για τη βάση
του τηλεχειριστήριου ST2.9 x 10
Σελίδα 7
Όνομα
Σχήμα Ποσότητα
1
1
1
1
Εξαρτήματα
5
5
2
1
2
Page 6
Η κλιματιστική μονάδα παρέχεται με τα ακόλουθα εξαρτήματα. Χρησιμοποιήστε όλα τα μέρη εγκατάστασης και τα
εξαρτήματα ώστε να εγκαταστήσετε το κλιματιστικό. Εσφαλμένη εγκατάσταση μπορεί να έχει ως αποτέλεσμα
διαροοή νερού, ηλεκτροπληξία και φωτιά, ή καταστροφές στο προϊόν.
Επιτοίχια βάση
Ούπα
Αυτοδιάτρητη βίδα ST3.9 X 25
Ασύρματο τηλεχειριστήριο
Βάση Ασύρματου
τηλεχειριστηρίου
Πώμα
Σύνδεσμος αποστράγγισης
Mπαταρίες ξηρού τύπου
ΑΑΑ LR03
Προαιρετικά
Μέρη
(Για μοντέλα ψύξης &
θέρμανσης μόνο)
Αυτοδιάτρητοη Βίδα για τη βάση
του τηλεχειριστήριου ST2.9 x 10
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
1
1
1
Εγχειρίδιο Χρήστη
Εγχειρίδιο Εγκατάστασης
Εγχειρίδιο
Τηλεχειριστηρίου
Ένωση
Συνδεδεμένων Αγωγών
Page 7
Όνομα
Σχήμα Ποσότητα
Εξαρτήματα που πρέπει να
αγοράσετε. Συμβουλευτείτε
τον προμηθευτή σας για το
μέγεθος των αγωγών.
Γραμμή
ρευστού
Γραμμή
Αερίου
Φ6.35( 1/4 i n)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ12.7(1/2in)
Φ 16( 5/8in)
Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να εγκαθίσταται σε χώρους με επαρκή εξαερισμό και σε μέρη που το
μέγεθος τους μπορεί να υποστηρίξει τη λειτουργία αυτής της μονάδας.
Για κλιματιστικά με ψυκτικό υγρό R32:
Η μονάδα θα πρέπει να εγκατασταθεί σε χώρο μεγαλύτερο των 4 m2 και με επαρκή
εξαερισμό.
Για κλιματιστικά με ψυκτικό υγρό R290, τα ελάχιστα επιτρεπτά τετραγωνικά του χώρου είναι:
<=9000Btu/h μονάδες: 13m
2
>9000Btu/h and <=12000Btu/h μονάδες: 17m
2
>12000Btu/h and <=18000Btu/h μονάδες: 26m
2
>18000Btu/h and <=24000Btu/h μονάδες: 35m
2
Φ 19( 3/4in)
USER’S MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
• USER’S MANUAL
• ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
• MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
REMOTE CONTROLLER
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗΣ
MANUAL DE INSTALARE
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
Σελίδα 8
Page 8
2
Installation
1 2
34
12cm
(4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm
(4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Περίληψη Εγκατάστασης -
Εσωτερική Μονάδα 2
Eπιλέξτε θέση Εγκατάστασης
(Σελίδα 11)
Προσαρμόστε την επιτοίχια πλακέτα
(Σελίδα 12)
Επιλέξτε τη θέση ανοίγματος
οπής στον τοίχο
(Σελίδα 12)
Ανοίξτε την οπή στον τοίχο
(Σελίδα 12)
Σελίδα 9
Page 9
STEP 8
567
8
9
Συνδέστε τους αγωγούς
(Σελίδα 25)
Συνδέστε τις καλωδιώσεις
(Σελίδα 17)
Τυλίξτε Αγωγούς και Καλωδιώσεις
(δεν μπορεί να εφαρμοστεί σε ορισμένες περιοχές στην Αμερική)
(Σελίδα 18)
Προετοιμάστε τον
αγωγό αποστράγγισης
(Σελίδα 14)
Τοποθετήστε την Εσωτερική Μονάδα
(Σελίδα 18)
Σελίδα 10
Page 10
3
Fig. 3.1
Φίλτρο Λειτουργίας (Μπροστά από
το κύριο Φίλτρο – Ορισμένα μοντέλα)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
11
5
Μέρη Μονάδας
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΕΙΚΟΝΟΓΡΑΦΗΜΕΝΩΝ
Οι εικονογραφήσεις σε αυτό το εγχειρίδιο είναι για επεξηγηματικούς σκοπούς. Το πραγματικό σχήμα της
εσωτερικής σας μονάδας μπορεί να διαφέρει ελαφρώς. Το πραγματικό σχήμα θα επικρατήσει.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η εγκατάσταση του κλιματιστικού θα πρέπει να γίνεται πάντα σύμφωνα με
τους τοπικούς κανόνες και τις εθνικές διατάξεις. Ο τρόπος εγκατάστασης μπορεί να
εμφανίζει μικρές διαφορές ανάλογα τη περιοχή εγκατάστασης.
Βάση στήριξης
Καλώδιο Ρεύµατος
(Ορισµένες Μονάδες)
Αγωγός ψυκτικού µέσου
Καλώδιο Σήµατος
Τηλεχειριστήριο
Αγωγός Αποστράγγισης
Περσίδα
Βάση Τηλεχειριστηρίου
(ορισμένες μονάδες)
Μπροστινό Πάνελ
Air-break switch
Εξωτερική Μονάδα
Καλώδιο Ρεύµατος
(Ορισµένες Μονάδες)
Page 11
.4
Fig. 3.1-a
Page 11
Indoor Unit Installation 4
Installation Instructions – Indoor
Unit
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Before installing the indoor unit, refer to the
label on the product box to make sure that the
model number of the indoor unit matches the
model number of the outdoor unit.
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the indoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Good air circulation
o
Convenient drainage
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb other
people
o
Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate
o
Strong enough to support the weight of the
unit
o
A location at least one meter from all other
electrical devices (e.g., TV, radio, computer)
DO NOT install unit in the following
locations:
Near any source of heat, steam, or
combustible gas
Near �ammable items such as curtains or
clothing
Near any obstacle that might block air
circulation
Near the doorway
In a location subject to direct sunlight
NOTE ABOUT WALL HOLE:
If there is no fiFIxed refrigerant piping:
While choosing a location, be aware that you
should leave ample room for a wall hole (see
Drill wall hole for connective piping step)
for the signal cable and refrigerant piping
that connect the indoor and outdoor units.
The default position for all piping is the right
side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit).
However, the unit can accommodate piping to
both the left and right.
Fig. 3.1-a
Εικ. 3.1
Σελίδα 11
Page 11
.4
Fig. 3.1-a
Εγκατάσταση Εσωτερικής Μονάδας
Οδηγίες Εγκατάστασης- Εσωτερική
Μονάδα
ΣΗΜΑΝΤΙΚΟ ΣΤΗΝ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗ
Πριν την εγκατάσταση της εσωτερικής μονάδας,
ανατρέξτε στο ταμπελάκι του κουτιού του προϊό-
ντος για να διασφα- λίσετε ότι ο αριθμός του μο-
ντέλου της εσωτερικής μονάδας ταιριάζει με τον
αριθμό του μοντέλου της εξωτερικής μονάδας.
Βήμα 1: Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης.
Πριν εγκαταστήσετε την εσωτερική μονάδα, θα
πρέπει να επιλέξετε κατάλληλη τοποθεσία. Οι ακό-
λουθες είναι προϋποθέσεις που θα σας βοηθή-
σουν να βρείτε κατάλληλη τοποθεσία.
Για σωστή τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης ακολου-
θήστε τις παρακάτω οδηγίες:
o
Καλή ανακυκλοφορία αέρα
o
Επαρκής αποστράγγιση
o
Ο θόρυβος από τη μονάδα δεν θα ενοχλεί τους
παρευρισκόμενους
o
Σταθερή και στιβαρή τοποθεσία για αποφυγή
κραδασμών
o
Στιβαρό αρκετά να υποστηρίξει το βάρος της
μονάδας
o
Τοποθεσία τουλάχιστον 1 μέτρο μακριά από
ηλεκτρικές συσκευές (πχ. Τηλεόραση, Ραδιόφωνο,
Υπολογιστή)
ΜΗΝ εγκαθιστάτε τη µονάδα στιc ακόλουθεc
τοποθεσίεc:
Δίπλα σε εύφλεκτα αντικείμενα όπως κουρτίνες
ή ρούχα
Δίπλα σε εμπόδια που μπορεί να μπλοκάρουν
την ανακυκλοφορία του αέρα
Δίπλα από το άνοιγμα πόρτας
Σε περιοχές απευθείας έκθεσης στην ηλιακή
ακτινοβολία
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΓΙΑ ΤΗΝ ΟΠΗ ΤΟΙΧΟΥ:
Αν δεν υπάρχει σταθερός αγωγός ψυκτικού μέ-
σου: Όταν θα ψάχνετε για τοποθεσία εγκατάστα-
σης, να γνωρίζετε ότι πρέπει να αφήσετε αρκε-
τό χώρο για την οπή στον τοίχο (Δείτε το Βήμα
“Ανοίξτε την οπή στον τοίχο για τον αγωγό σύν-
δεσης) για το καλώδιο σήματος
και τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου που ενώνει την
εσωτερική με την εξωτερική μονάδα. Η προεπι-
λεγμένη τοποθέτηση για όλες τις σωληνώσεις εί-
ναι η δεξιά πλευρά της εσωτε- ρικής μονάδας (
όπως βλέπετε τη μονάδα). Παρόλα αυτά, η μονά-
δα μπορεί να προσαρμόσει αγωγό και στις δυο
πλευρές, αριστερά και δεξιά.
Page 11
Indoor Unit Installation 4
Installation Instructions – Indoor
Unit
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Before installing the indoor unit, refer to the
label on the product box to make sure that the
model number of the indoor unit matches the
model number of the outdoor unit.
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the indoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Good air circulation
o
Convenient drainage
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb other
people
o
Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate
o
Strong enough to support the weight of the
unit
o
A location at least one meter from all other
electrical devices (e.g., TV, radio, computer)
DO NOT install unit in the following
locations:
Near any source of heat, steam, or
combustible gas
Near �ammable items such as curtains or
clothing
Near any obstacle that might block air
circulation
Near the doorway
In a location subject to direct sunlight
NOTE ABOUT WALL HOLE:
If there is no fiFIxed refrigerant piping:
While choosing a location, be aware that you
should leave ample room for a wall hole (see
Drill wall hole for connective piping step)
for the signal cable and refrigerant piping
that connect the indoor and outdoor units.
The default position for all piping is the right
side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit).
However, the unit can accommodate piping to
both the left and right.
Fig. 3.1-a
Εικ. 3.1-a
Σελίδα 12
Βήμα 2: Προσαρμόστε την επιτοίχια πλακέτα
στον τοίχο
Η επιτοίχια πλακέτα είναι η συσκευή στην οποία
τοποθετείτε την εσωτερική μονάδα.
1. Αφαιρέστε τη βίδα που προσαρμόζεται η επι-
τοίχια πλακέτα στο πίσω μέρος της εσωτερικής
μονάδας.
2. Τοποθετήστε την επιτοίχια μονάδα στον τοίχο
σε τοποθεσία που συμφωνεί με τις προϋποθέ-
σεις του βήματος “Επιλέξτε Τοποθεσία Εγκατά-
στασης”.(Δείτε Διαστάσεις Επιτοίχιας Πλακέτας
για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τα
μεγέθη επιτοίχιας πλακέτας.)
3. Ανοίξτε οπές για τις επιτοίχιες βίδες σε μέρη
που:
• έχουν καρφιά που υποστηρίζουν το βάρος της
μονάδας
• ανταποκρίνονται ορθά στις προδιαγραφές βι-
δών της επιτοίχιας πλακέτας
4. Επιβεβαιώστε το ταίριασμα στις βίδες μεταξύ
επιτοίχιας πλακέτας και τοίχου
5. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι η επιτοίχια πλακέτα είναι επί-
πεδη στον τοίχο.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΓΙΑ ΤΟΙΧΟΥΣ ΜΕ ΤΟΥΒΛΑ Η
ΣΚΥΡΟΔΕΜΑ:
Αν ο τοίχος είναι κατασκευασμένος από τούβλο,
σκυρόδεμα ή παρόμοια υλικά, ανοίξτε οπές δι-
αμέτρου (0.2in) στον τοίχο και τοποθετήστε ού-
πες στερεώματος που παρέχονται. Έπειτα εφαρ-
μόστε την επιτοίχια πλακέτα στον τοίχο βιδώ-
νοντας στα κλιπ στερέωσης.
Βήμα 3: Διάνοιξη οπής στον τοίχο για τον
αγωγό σύνδεσης
Θα πρέπει να ανοίξετε οπή στον τοίχο για τη σω-
λήνα ψυκτικού μέσου, τη σωλήνα αποστράγγισης
και το καλώδιο σήματος που θα ενώνει την εσω-
τερική με την εξωτερική μονάδα.
1. Εξακριβώστε τη τοποθεσία της οπής στον
τοίχο βάση της θέσης της επιτοίχιας πλακέτας.
Ανατρέξτε στις Διαστάσεις Επιτοίχιας Πλακέτας
στο επόμενο βήμα ώστε να εξακριβώσετε την
ιδανική θέση. Η οπή στον τοίχο θα πρέπει
να έχει διάμετρο 65mm (2.5in) το λιγότερο
και να είναι ελαφρώς υπό γωνία ώστε να
πραγματοποιείται αποστράγγιση.
2. Χρησιμοποιώντας τρυπάνι Φ65mm, ανοίξτε
οπή στον τοίχο. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι η οπή θα
ανοιχτεί υπό κάθετη γωνία, έτσι ώστε το
εξωτερικό τελείωμα της τρύπας να είναι
χαμηλότερο από το εσωτερικό τελείωμα
κατά 5mm έως 7mm (0.2- 0.275in). Αυτό θα
επιβεβαιώσει την απαραίτητη αποστράγγιση
νερού. (Δείτε Σχ.3.2)
3. Τοποθετήστε το προστατευτικό κάλυμμα πάνω
από τη τρύπα. Αυτό προστατεύει τις γωνίες της
οπής και θα βοηθήσει στη κάλυψή της όταν
τελειώσετε τη διαδικασία εγκατάστασης.
Page 12
Refer to the following diagram to ensure proper distance from walls and ceiling:
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm (4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Step 2: Attach mounting plate to wall
The mounting plate is the device on which you
will mount the indoor unit.
1.
Remove the screw that attaches the mounting
plate to the back of the indoor unit.
2.
Place the mounting plate against the wall
in a location that meets the standards in
the Select Installation Location step. (See
Mounting Plate Dimensions for detailed
information on mounting plate sizes.)
3.
Drill holes for mounting screws in places that:
have studs and can support the weight of
the unit
correspond to screw holes in the mounting
plate
4.
Secure the mounting plate to the wall with
the screws provided.
5.
Make sure that mounting plate is flat against
the wall.
NOTE FOR CONCRETE OR BRICK WALLS:
If the wall is made of brick, concrete, or similar
material, drill 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter)
holes in the wall and insert the sleeve anchors
provided. Then secure the mounting plate to
the wall by tightening the screws directly into
the clip anchors.
Step 3: Drill wall hole for connective piping
You must drill a hole in the wall for refrigerant
piping, the drainage pipe, and the signal cable
that will connect the indoor and outdoor units.
1.
Determine the location of the wall hole based
on the position of the mounting plate. Refer
to Mounting Plate Dimensions on the
next page to help you determine the optimal
position. The wall hole should have a 65mm
(2.5in) diameter at least, and at a slightly
lower angle to facilitate drainage.
2.
3.
Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This
protects the edges of the hole and will help
seal it when you finish the installation process.
CAUTION
When drilling the wall hole, make sure to
avoid wires, plumbing, and other sensitive
components.
Using a 65mm (2.5in) or 90mm(3.54in)
(depending on models )core drill, drill a
hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole
is drilled at
a slight downward angle, so
that the outdoor end of the hole is lower
than the indoor end by about 5mm to 7mm
(0.2-0.27in). This will ensure proper water
drainage. (See Fig. 3.2)
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
Όταν ανοίγετε την οπή στον τοίχο, βεβαιω-
θείτε ότι αποφεύγετε καλώδια, υδραυλικούς
αγωγούς ή άλλα ευαίσθητα εξαρτήματα.
Ανατρέξτε στο ακόλουθο διάγραμμα ώστε να επιβεβαιώσετε την κατάλληλη απόσταση από
τους τοίχους και την οροφή:
ή περισσότερο
ή περισσότερο
ή περισσότεροή περισσότερο
Εικ. 3.1-b
Page 13
mm7-5
(0.2-0.27in)
Fig.3.2
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
Model B
Model A
146.5mm(5.76in)
228.5mm(8.99in) 241mm(9.48in)
45mm(1.7in) 101.6mm(4in)
183.6mm(7.2in)
123.6mm(4.86in)
715mm(28in)
805mm(31.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
115.6mm(4.55in)
233.1mm(9.17in)
398mm(15.67in)
398mm(15.98in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
302mm (11.88in)
36.6mm
(1.44in)
36.7mm
(1.44in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47.5mm
(1.87in)
Model C
304.1mm(11.9in) 224.2mm(8.82in)
45mm(1.7in)
259.1mm(10.2in)
100.6mm(3.96in)123.7mm(4.87in)
958.3mm(37.7in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
324.9mm (12.79in)
55mm
(2.16in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47mm
(1.85in)
55mm
(2.16in)
Model D
316.7mm(12.4in)
1037.6mm(40.85in)
271.7mm(10.69in)
291mm(11.45in)
246mm(9.68in)
45mm(1.77in)
45mm(1.77in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
45mm(1.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
439mm(17.28in)
506mm(19.92in)
Σελίδα 13
ΔΙΑΣΤΑΣΕΙΣ ΒΑΣΗΣ ΣΤΗΡΙΞΗΣ
Διαφορετικά μοντέλα έχουν διαφορετικές βά-
σεις στήριξης. Με σκοπό να επιβεβαιώσε-
τε ότι έχετε αρκετό χώρο στο δωμάτιο για να
τοποθετήσετε την εσωτερική σας μονάδα, το
διάγραμμα στα δεξιά εμφανίζει διαφορετι-
κούς τύπους επιτοίχιων μονάδων σύμφωνα
με τις ακόλουθες διαστάσεις:
• Πλάτος βάσης στήριξης
• Ύψος βάσης στήριξης
• Πλάτος εσωτερικής μονάδας αναφορικά με
την βάσης στήριξης
• Ύψος εσωτερικής μονάδας αναφορικά με
την βάσης στήριξης
• Προτεινόμενη θέση της τρύπας τοίχου (για
τη δεξιά και αριστερή βάση στηριξης)
• Σχετικές αποστάσεις μεταξύ βιδών
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Όταν ο αγωγός αερίου έχει διάμετρο
Φ16mm(5/8in) ή μεγαλύτερη, η οπή στον τοίχο θα
πρέπει να είναι 90mm(3.54in).
Εσωτερικό Εξωτερικό
Τοίχος
Σωστός προσανατολισμός Επιτοίχιας Μονάδας
Εικ. 3.2
Page 13
mm7-5
(0.2-0.27in)
Fig.3.2
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
Model B
Model A
146.5mm(5.76in)
228.5mm(8.99in) 241mm(9.48in)
45mm(1.7in) 101.6mm(4in)
183.6mm(7.2in)
123.6mm(4.86in)
715mm(28in)
805mm(31.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
115.6mm(4.55in)
233.1mm(9.17in)
398mm(15.67in)
398mm(15.98in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
302mm (11.88in)
36.6mm
(1.44in)
36.7mm
(1.44in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47.5mm
(1.87in)
Model C
304.1mm(11.9in) 224.2mm(8.82in)
45mm(1.7in)
259.1mm(10.2in)
100.6mm(3.96in)123.7mm(4.87in)
958.3mm(37.7in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
324.9mm (12.79in)
55mm
(2.16in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47mm
(1.85in)
55mm
(2.16in)
Model D
316.7mm(12.4in)
1037.6mm(40.85in)
271.7mm(10.69in)
291mm(11.45in)
246mm(9.68in)
45mm(1.77in)
45mm(1.77in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
45mm(1.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
439mm(17.28in)
506mm(19.92in)
Σελίδα 14
Page 14
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Βήμα 4: Προετοιμάστε τον αγωγό ψυκτικού
μέσου
Ο αγωγός ψυκτικού μέσου είναι εντός της προ-
στατευμένης θήκης στο πίσω μέρος της μονά-
δας. Πρέπει να προετοιμάσετε τη σωλήνωση πριν
τη περάσετε μέσα από τον τοίχο. Ανατρέξτε στην
ενότητα Σύνδεση Αγωγού Ψυκτικού Μέσου αυτού
του εγχειριδίου για περισσότερες λεπτομέριες
σχετικά με το άνοιγμα του αγωγού, την περιστρο-
φή του, τις τεχνικές προδιαγραφές κλπ.
1. Βασιζόμενοι στη θέση της οπής του τοίχου
σχετικά με την επιτοίχια πλακέτα, επιλέξτε τη
πλευρά από την οποία θα βγαίνει ο αγωγός
από τη μονάδα.
2. Αν η οπή είναι πίσω από τη μονάδα, κρατήστε
εκεί το αφαιρούμενο πάνελ. Αν η οπή είναι από
τη πλευρά της εσωτερικής μονάδας, αφαιρέστε
το πλαστικό αφαιρούμενο πάνελ από αυτή
τη πλευρά της μονάδας. (Δείτε Σχ. 3.8). Αυτό
θα δημιουργήσει ένα κενό μέσω του οποίου
μπορεί να βγαίνει ο αγωγός από τη μονάδα.
Χρησιμοποιήστε ειδική πένσα αν το πλαστικό
πάνελ είναι πολύ δύσκολο να αφαιρεθεί με το
χέρι.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΓΙΑ ΓΩΝΙΑ ΑΓΩΓΟΥ
Ο αγωγός του ψυκτικού μέσου μπορεί να
βγει από την εσωτερική μονάδα από 4 δια-
φορετικές γωνίες:
• Αριστερή πλευρά
• Αριστερή πίσω πλευρά
• Δεξιά πλευρά
• Δεξιά πίσω πλευρά
Ανατρέξτε στο Σχ.3.4 για λεπτομέριες
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
Να είστε ιδιαίτερα προσεκτικοί να μην προκαλέσετε βαθούλωμα ή καταστροφή του αγωγού κατά τη δι-
άρκεια που τα βγάζετε από το μηχά- νημα. Οποιοδήποτε βαθούλωμα στον αγωγό μπορεί να έχει επιπτώ-
σεις στην λειτουργία της μονάδας.
3. Χρησιμοποιήστε ψαλίδια να κόψετε το μήκος
της μονωτικής ταινίας αφήνοντας περίπου
15cm (6in) από τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου.
Αυτό εξυπηρετεί 2 σκοπούς:
• Να διευκολύνει τη διαδικασία σύνδεσης του
αγωγού Ψυκτικού Μέσου
• Να διευκολύνει τον έλεγχο για διαρροή και
τον έλεγχο βαθουλώματος
4. Εάν υπάρχουν ήδη υπάρχουσες συνδετικές
σωληνώσεις ενσωματωμένες στον τοίχο,
προχωρήστε απευθείας στο το βήμα σύνδεσης
σωλήνα αποστράγγισης. Εάν δεν υπάρχουν
ενσωματωμένες σωληνώσεις, συνδέστε τον
αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου της εσωτερικής μονάδας
στον αγωγό σύνδεσης της εσωτερικής με την
εξωτερική μονάδα. Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα
Σύνδεση Αγωγού Ψυκτικού Μέσου αυτού του
εγχειριδίου για περισσότερες πληροφορίες.
5. Βασιζόμενοι στη θέση της οπής του τοίχου
σχετικά με την επιτοίχια πλακέτα, επιβεβαιώστε
την απαραίτητη γωνία του αγωγού.
6. Τυλίξτε τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου στη βάση
στήριξης.
7. Αργά, χωρίς σχεδόν καμία πίεση, στηρίξτε τον
αγωγό σύμφωνα με την οπή. ΜΗΝ λυγίζετε ή
καταστρέφετε τον αγωγό κατά τη διάρκεια της
διαδικασίας.
Αφαιρούμενο πάνελ
Σχ. 3.4
Σχ. 3.3
Page 16
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Σελίδα 15
Page 16
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Βήμα 5. Συνδέστε τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης
Προεπιλεγμένα, ο αγωγός αποστράγγισης είναι εν-
σωματωμένος στην αριστερή πλευρά της μονάδας
(όπως βλέπετε το πίσω μέρος της μονάδας). Παρό-
λα αυτά, μπορεί επίσης να ενσωματωθεί στη δεξιά
πλευρά.
1. Για να διασφαλίσετε την απαραίτητη αποστράγ-
γιση, ενσωματώστε τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης
στην ίδια πλευρά που ο αγωγός του ψυκτικού μέ-
σου βγαίνει από τη μονάδα.
2. Ενσωματώστε επέκταση του αγωγού
αποστράγγισης παγιδεύση του νερού.
(ξεχωριστή χρέωση) στο τέλος του αγωγού
αποστράγγισης.
3. Τυλίξτε το σημείο σύνδεσης με Teflon ταινία
ώστε να διασφαλίσετε καλή μόνωση και να
αποφύγετε την όποια διαρροή.
4. Για το τμήμα του αγωγού αποστράγγισης που
θα παραμείνει εντός της μονάδας, τυλίξτε το με
αφρώδη μόνωση σωλήνα ώστε να αποφύγετε
την όποια υγροποίηση.
5. Αφαιρέστε το φίλτρο αέρα και αδειάστε
μικρή ποσότητα νερού μέσα στο δοχείο
αποστράγγισης ώστε να βεβαιωθείτε ότι το
νερό ρέει ομαλά.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΣΤΗΝ ΤΟΠΟΘΕΤΗΣΗ
ΤΟΥ ΑΓΩΓΟΥ ΑΠΟΣΤΡΑΓΓΙΣΗΣ
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι τοποθετήσατε τον αγωγό
αποστράγγισης σύμφωνα με το Σχ. 3.9.
ΜΗΝ λυγίζετε τον αγωγό
αποστράγγισης.
ΜΗΝ παγιδεύετε το νερό.
ΜΗΝ τοποθετείτε το άκρο του αγωγού
αποστράγγισης μέσα στο νερό ή σε δοχείο
που συλλέγει νερό.
ΦΡΑΞΤΕ ΤΟΝ ΑΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΠΟΙΗΤΟ
ΑΓΩΓΟ ΑΠΟΣΤΡΑΓΓΙΣΗΣ
Για να αποφύγετε ανεπιθύμητες διαρροές
θα πρέπει να φράσετε τον αχρησιμοποίητο
αγωγό αποστράγγισης με την ενδεικνυμένη
τσιμούχα.
ΣΩΣΤΟ
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν
υπάρχουν τσακίσματα
ή βαθουλώματα στον
αγωγό αποστράγγισης
ώστε να διασφαλίσετε την
απαραίτητη αποστράγγιση
ΛΑΘΟΣ
Τσάκιση στον αγωγό
αποστράγγισης θα
οδηγήσει στην παγιδεύση
του νερού.
ΛΑΘΟΣ
Τσάκιση στον αγωγό
αποστράγγισης θα
οδηγήσει στη
παγιδεύση του νερού.
ΛΑΘΟΣ
Μην τοποθετείτε το
άκρο του αγωγού
αποστράγγισης μέσα
σε νερό ή σε δοχείο
συλλογής νερού. Αυτό
μπορεί να προκαλέσει
διαρροή.
Σχ. 3.5
Σχ. 3.6
Σχ. 3.8
Σχ. 3.7
Σελίδα 16
ΠΡΙΝ ΕΚΚΙΝΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΙΣ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΕΣ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΕΣ,
ΔΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΑΥΤΕΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΕΣ
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
1. Η ηλεκτρολογικές συνδέσεις θα πρέπει να συμφωνούν πλήρως με τις τοπικές και εθνικές οδηγίες
και θα πρέπει να εγκατα- σταθούν από εξουσιοδοτημένο ηλεκτρολόγο.
2. Όλες οι ηλεκτρολογικές συνδέσεις πρέπει να είναι σύμφωνες με Διάγραμμα Ηλεκτρο- λογικής
Σύνδεσης που βρίσκεται στο πάνελ της εσωτερικής και εξωτερικής μονάδας.
3. Αν υπάρχει σοβαρό θέμα ασφαλείας με τη παροχή ρεύματος, σταματήστε τις διεργασίες
αμέσως. Εξηγήστε τους λόγους στον πελάτη και αρνηθείτε να εγκαταστήσετε τη μονάδα μέχρι να
αποκατασταθεί η βλάβη.
4. Η τάση του ρεύματος θα πρέπει να είναι μεταξύ 90-100% της βαθμονομημένης τάσης.
Απροσδιόριστη παροχή ρεύματος μπορεί να προκαλέσει δυσλειτουργία, ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά.
5. Αν τροφοδοτήσετε με ρεύμα την ηλεκτρολογική εγκατάσταση του χώρου παρακαλείσθε να
βάλετε διάταξη προστασίας υπέρτασης και ασφαλειιοδιακόπτη με χωρητι- κότητα 1.5 φορά
μεγαλύτερη από τη μέγιστη ένταση ρεύματος της μονάδας.
6. Αν τροφοδοτήσετε με ρεύμα τις ηλεκτρολογικές συνδέσεις, ένας διακόπτης ή ασφαλειο-
διακόπτης που αποσυνδέει όλους τους πόλους και έχει διαχωριστική επαφή τουλάχιστον 1/8in
(3mm) θα πρέπει να είναι σύμφωνος με την ηλεκτρολογική σύνδεση. Ο εξειδικευμένος τεχνικός
πρέπει να χρησιμοποιεί αυτόματο διακόπτη κυκλώματος.
7. Συνδέστε τη μονάδα σε ανεξάρτητο ηλεκτρο- λογικό κύκλωμα. Μην συνδέετε άλλες συσκευές σε
αυτή τη πρίζα.
8. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι το κλιματιστικό είναι σωστά στερεωμένο.
9. Κάθε καλώδιο θα πρέπει να είναι σφιχτά συν- δεδεμένο. Απώλεια ρεύματος μπορεί να οδη-
γήσει σε υπερθέρμανση της μονάδας, οδηγώ- ντας σε δυλειτουργία του προϊόντος και πιθανή
φωτιά.
10. Μην αφήνετε τις επαφές καλωδίων ή άλλα μέρη εκτεθειμένα στον ψυκτικό κύκλο, τον
συμπιεστή ή οποιοδήποτε άλλο κινητό μέρος της μονάδας.
11. Αν η μονάδα έχει βοηθητικό θερμαντικό σώμα, αυτό θα πρέπει να εγκατασταθεί τουλά-
χιστον 1 μέτρο (40in) μακριά από εύφλεκτα υλικά.
ΠΡΙΝ ΤΙΣ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΝΙΚΕΣ Ή ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΕΡΓΑΣΙΕΣ, ΑΠΟΣΥΝΔΕΣΤΕ ΤΗ ΚΥΡΙΑ
ΠΑΡΟΧΗ ΡΕΥΜΑΤΟΣ ΑΠΟ ΤΟ ΣΥΣΤΗΜΑ.
Σελίδα 17
> 3 6
> 6 101
> 10 161
> 16 252
> 25 324
> 32 406
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Βήμα 6: Συνδέστε το καλώδιο σήματος
Το καλώδιο σήματος διευκολύνει την επικοινωνία
μεταξύ εξωτερικής και εσωτερικής μονάδας. Θα
πρέπει πρώτα να επιλέξετε το σωστό μέγεθος κα-
λωδίου πριν παραγματοποιήσετε τη σύνδεση.
Τύποι Καλωδίων
• Εσωτερικό Καλώδιο Παροχής (Αν εφαρμόζεται)
Η05V2V2-F
• Εξωτερικό Καλώδιο Παροχής Η07RN-F
• Καλώδιο σήματος: H07RN-F
Ελάχιστη Διατομή Καλωδίου για καλώδια
Ρεύματος και Σήματος
Βόρεια Αμερική
Άλλες περιοχές
ΕΠΙΛΕΞΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΛΛΗΛΟ ΜΕΓΕΘΟΣ
ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟΥ
Το κατάλληλο μέγεθος του καλωδίου τροφο-
δοσίας, του καλωδίου σήματος, του καλωδί-
ου ασφαλείας και του διακόπτη καθορίζεται
από το μέγιστο ρεύμα που ενδείκνυται από
τη συσκευή. Ανατρέξτε στο ταμπελάκι που
βρίσκεται στη πλευρά του πίνακα, ώστε να
επιλέξετε το σωστό μέγεθος καλωδίου, την
ασφάλεια ή τον διακόπτη.
Τάση Συσκευής (Α)
Τάση Συσκευής (Α)
AWG
Διατομή Καλωδίου
(mm²)
και
και
και
και
και
και
0,75
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
ΠΡΟΣΕΞΤΕ ΤΟ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟ ΦΑΣΗΣ
Όταν πιέζετε μαζί τα καλώδια, βεβαιωθείτε ότι
έχετε ξεχωρίσει το καλώδιο φάσης από τα άλλα
καλώδια.
2. Ανοίξτε το μπροστινό πάνελ της εσωτερικής
μονάδας.
3. Χρησιμοποιήστε κατσαβίδι Phillips και
αφαιρέστε το κάλυμμα το ηλεκτρικού κουτιού
στη δεξιά πλευρά της μονάδας. Αυτό θα
ελευθερώσει το μπλοκ των ακροδεκτών.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΤΕ ΤΙΣ ΠΡΟΔΙΑΓΡΑΦΕΣ
ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟΥ ΑΣΦΑΛΕΙΑΣ
Ο ηλεκτρολογικός πίνακας του κλιματιστικού εί-
ναι σχεδιασμένος με καλώδιο ασφαλείας ώστε να
παρέχει προστασία. Οι προδιαγραφές του καλω-
δίου ασφαλείας είναι τυπωμένες στον
ηλεκτρολογικό πίνακα, όπως:
Εσωτερική μονάδα: T5A/250VAC
Εξωτερική μονάδα (εφαρμόζεται σε μονάδες
που περιέχουν ψυκτικό R32 ή R290):
T20A/250VAC(<=18000Btu/h μοντέλα)
T30A/250VAC(>18000Btu/h μοντέλα)
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οι ασφάλειες κατασκευάζονται
από κεραμικό υλικό.
1. Ετοιμάστε το καλώδιο για τη σύνδεση:
A. Χρησιμοποιήστε απογυμνοτές καλωδίων,
αφαιρέστε το πλαστικό περίβλημα και
στα δυο άκρα του καλωδίου ώστε να
αποκαλυφθούν περίπου 15 cm (6in) των
καλωδίων
Β. Βγάλτε τη μόνωση από τις άκρες των
καλωδίων. Γ. Χρησιμοποιήστε πένσα για να
δημιουργήσετε απολύξεις τύπου U στις άκρες
των καλωδίων.
Page 17
Step 6: Connect signal cable
The signal cable enables communication between
the indoor and outdoor units. You must fiFIrst
choose the right cable size before preparing it for
connection.
Cable Types
Indoor Power Cable (if applicable):
H05VV-F or H05V2V2-F
Outdoor Power Cable: H07RN-F
Signal Cable: H07RN-F
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Power and Signal Cables
Other Regions
Rated Current of
Appliance (A)
Nominal Cross-Sectional
Area (mm²)
> 3 and 6 0.75
> 6 and 10 1
> 10 and 16 1.5
> 16 and 25 2.5
> 25 and 32 4
> 32 and 40 6
CHOOSE THE RIGHT CABLE SIZE
The size of the power supply cable, signal
cable, fuse, and switch needed is determined
by the maximum current of the unit. The
maximum current is indicated on the nameplate
located on the side panel of the unit. Refer to
this nameplate to choose the right cable, fuse,
or switch.
TAKE NOTE OF FUSE SPECIFICATIONS
The air conditioner’s circuit board (PCB) is
designed with a fuse to provide overcurrent
protection. The specifications of the fuse
Fig. 3.9
North America
Appliance Amps (A) AWG
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Σχ. 3.9
Το Διάγραμμα Καλωδίων
βρίσκεται στο εσωτερικό μέρος
του καλύμματος καλωδίων της
εσωτερικής μονάδας.
Τερματικό
Κάλυμμα
καλωδίου
Σφιγκτήρας
καλωδίου
Βίδα
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΟΛΕΣ ΟΙ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΕΙΣ ΠΡΕΠΕΙ ΝΑ ΕΙΝΑΙ
ΑΠΟΛΥΤΑ ΣΥΜΦΩΝΕΣ ΜΕ ΤΟ ΔΙΑΓΡΑΜΜΑ
ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΗΣ ΠΟΥ ΒΡΙΣΚΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΟ ΕΣΩΤΕΡΙΚΟ
ΜΕΡΟΣ ΤΟΥ ΚΑΛΥΜΜΑΤΟΣ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ
ΕΣΩΤΕΡΙΚΗΣ ΜΟΝΑΔΑΣ.
4. Ξεβιδώστε τον σφιγκτήρα καλωδίου κάτω από
το τερματικό
Σελίδα 18
Page 19
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ ΓΙΑ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΕΙΣ
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
ΜΗΝ ΜΠΛΕΚΕΤΕ ΤΑ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟ ΤΑΣΗΣ
ΚΑΙ ΟΥΔΕΤΕΡΟΥ
Αυτό είναι επικίνδυνο και μπορεί να
προκαλέσει δυσλειτουργίες στο κλιματιστικό.
8. Αφότου ελέγξετε να βεβαιωθείτε ότι κάθε
σύνδεση είναι ασφαλής, χρησιμοποιήστε το
σφιγκτήρα καλωδίων ώστε να συνδέσετε το
καλώδιο σήματος στη μονάδα. Βιδώστε τον
σφιγκτήρα καλωδίων προς τα κάτω γερά.
9. Αντικαταστήστε το κάλυμμα του καλωδίου στο
μπροστινό μέρος της μονάδας και το πλαστικό
κάλυμμα στο πίσω μέρος.
Η ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΗ ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗ
ΜΠΟΡΕΙ ΝΑ ΔΙΑΦΕΡΕΙ ΕΛΑΦΡΩΣ
ΜΕΤΑΞΥ ΤΩΝ ΜΟΝΑΔΩΝ.
Ο ΑΓΩΓΟΣ ΑΠΟΣΤΡΑΓΓΙΣΗΣ ΠΡΕΠΕΙ
ΝΑ ΒΡΙΣΚΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΟ ΚΑΤΩ ΜΕΡΟΣ
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο αγωγός αποστράγγισης βρί-
σκεται στο κάτω μέρος του τυλίγματος. Η τοπο-
θέτηση του στο πάνω μέρος μπορεί να επιφέ-
ρει υπερχείλιση προκαλώντας ηλεκτροπληξία &
φθορές.
ΜΗΝ ΜΠΛΕΚΕΤΕ ΤΑ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΑ ΣΗΜΑΤΟΣ
ΜΕ ΤΑ ΥΠΟΛΟΙΠΑ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΑ
Όταν τυλιγέτε τα καλώδια μαζί, μην μπλέκετε ή
σταυρώνετε το καλώδιο σήματος με κάποιο άλ-
λο καλώδιο
2. Χρησιμοποιείστε κολλώδη ταινία βυνιλίου,
ώστε να προσαρμόσετε τον αγωγό
αποστράγγισης στην κάτω μεριά του αγωγού
ψυκτικού μέσου.
3. Χρησιμποιήστε μονωτική ταινία, τυλίξτε το
καλώδιο σήματος, τους αγωγούς ψυκτικού
μέσου και τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης σφιχτά
μεταξύ τους. Ελέγξτε διπλά ότι όλα τα καλώδια
είναι τυλιγμένα σύμφωνα με το Σχ. 3.14
ΜΗΝ ΤΥΛΙΓΕΤΕ ΤΙΣ ΑΚΡΕΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΩΓΩΝ
Όταν τυλίγετε τη δέσμη των αγωγών, κρατήστε
τις άκρες τους ξετυλιγμένες. Χρειάζεται να έχε-
τε πρόσβαση στις άκρες ώστε να κάνετε έλεγ-
χο για διαρροές στο τέλος της διαδικασίας εγκα-
τάστασης (ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα Ηλεκτρολο-
γικός Έλεγχος και Έλεγχος Διαρροών αυτού του
εγχειριδίου
Βήμα 8: Τοποθετήστε την εσωτερική
μονάδα
Αν εγκαταστήσετε νέους αγωγούς σύνδεσης στην
εξωτερική μονάδα, ακολουθήστε τα παρακάτω:
1. Αν έχετε ήδη περάσει τον αγωγό ψυκτικού
μέσου μέσα στην τρύπα του τοίχου,
προχωρήστε στο Βήμα 4. 2. Διαφορετικά,
ελέγξτε διπλά ότι οι άκρες των αγωγών
ψυκτικού μέσου είναι μονωμένες ώστε να
αποφευχθεί η βρωμιά ή η εισχώρηση άλλων
αντικειμένων μέσα στους αγωγούς.
3. Περάστε αργά τη τυλιγμένη δέσμη των αγωγών
ψυκτικού μέσου, αποστράγγισης και καλωδίου
σήματος, μέσα από την οπή του τοίχου.
4. Γαντζώστε το πάνω μέρος της εσωτερικής
μονάδας στον πάνω γάντζο της επιτοίχιας
πλακέτας.
5. Ελέγξτε ότι η μονάδα είναι σφιχτά γαντζωμένη
στην επιτοίχια πλακέτα εφαρμόζοντας ελαφριά
πίεση στην αριστερή και δεξιά πλευρά της
μονάδας. Η μονάδα δεν θα πρέπει να κουνιέται
ή να αλλάζει θέση.
Βήμα 7: Τυλίξτε καλώδια και αγωγούς
Πριν περάσετε τον αγωγό, τον αγωγό αποστράγ-
γισης και το καλώδιο σήματος μέσω της οπής του
τοίχου, θα πρέπει να τα δέσετε μαζί ώστε να εξοι-
κονομήσετε χώρο, να τα προστατέψετε και να τα
μονώσετε.
1. Τυλίξτε τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης, τους
αγωγούς του ψυκτικού και το καλώδιο σήματος
σύμφωνα με τον πίνακα Σχ. 3.10.
Εσωτερική
Μονάδα Χώρος
πίσω από
τη μονάδα
Αγωγός
ψυκτικού μέσου
Πώμα μόνωσης
Page 19
Fig. 3.14
Σχ. 3.10
Αγωγός
απόστράγγισης
Καλώδιο σήματος
5. Βλέποντας το πίσω μέρος της μονάδας,
αφαιρέστε το πλαστικό πάνελ στο κάτω μέρος
της αριστερής πλευράς.
6. Τροφοδοτήστε το καλώδιο σήματος μέσω
αυτής της υποδοχής, από το πίσω μέρος της
μονάδας στο μπροστινό.
7. Βλέποντας το μπροστινό μέρος της μονάδας,
ταιριάξτε τα χρώματα των καλωδίων με τα
ταμπελάκια στο τερματικό, ενώστε την επαφή
και σφιχτά βιδώστε κάθε καλώδιο στην
αντίστοιχη υποδοχή.
Σελίδα 19
Page 19
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
ΠΡΟΣΑΡΜΟΓΉ ΤΗΣ ΜΟΝΑΔΑΣ
Τα άγκιστρα στην πλακέτα στήριξης είναι μικρότερα από τις οπές στο πίσω μέρος της
μονάδας. Εάν διαπιστώσετε ότι δεν έχετε αρκετό χώρο για να συνδέσετε τους ενσωματωμένους σωλή-
νες στην εσωτερική μονάδα, τότε η μονάδα θα πρέπει να ρυθμιστεί αριστερά ή δεξιά κατά περίπου 30-
50mm (1,25-1,95in), ανάλογα με το μοντέλο. (Δείτε Σχήμα 3.12)
6. Ασκήστε παραπάνω πίεση, σπρώξτε προς
τα κάτω στα μέσα της μονάδας. Συνεχίστε
να πιέζετε προς τα κάτω, μέχρι η μονάδα να
γαντζωθεί σε όλο το μήκος το κάτω μέρος της
επιτοίχιας μονάδας.
7. Ξανά, ελέγξτε ότι η μονάδα εφαρμόζεται
ακριβώς ασκώντας ελαφριά πίεση στην
αριστερή και δεξιά πλευρά της μονάδας.
Αν ο αγωγός ψυκτικού μέσου είναι έτοιμος να
διαπεράσει τον τοίχο, ακολουθήστε το παρα-
κάτω:
1. Στηρίξτε το πάνω μέρος της εσωτερικής
μονάδας στο επάνω άγκιστρο της πλακέτας
στήριξης.
2. Χρησιμοποιήστε ένα βραχίονα ή μια σφήνα
για να στηρίξετε τη μονάδα, εξασφαλίζοντας
αρκετό χώρο για να συνδέσετε τις τις
σωληνώσεις του ψυκτικού μέσου, το καλώδιο
σήματος και τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης.
Ανατρέξτε στο Σχ. 3.11
3. Συνδέστε τον σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης και
τον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέσου (ανατρέξτε στην
ενότητα Αγωγός Ψυκτικού Μέσου αυτού του
εγχειριδίου για οδηγίες)
4. Κρατήστε το σημείο σύνδεσης του αγωγού
εκτεθειμένο ώστε να κάνετε το τεστ διαρροής
(ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα ελέγχου για
Ηλεκτρολογικές Διαρροές και Διαρροές Υγρών
αυτού του εγχειριδίου).
5. Μετά από το τεστ διαρροής, τυλίξτε το σημείο
σύνδεσης με μονωτική ταινία.
6. Αφαιρέστε το κομμάτι που φέρει η μονωτική
ταινία.
7. Ασκήστε πίεση, πιέζοντας προς τα κάτω στη
μέση της μονάδας. Συνεχίστε να πιέζετε προς
τα κάτω μέχρι η μονάδα να γαντζωθεί στην
επιτοίχια πλακέτα.
Μετακινήστε αριστερά ή δεξιά
Σχ. 3.11
Σχ. 3.12
Σελίδα 20
Page 20
.5
)ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
30cm (12in)
200cm (79in)
30cm (12in)
Fig. 4.1
Εγκατάσταση Εξωτερικής Μονάδας
Οδηγίες Εγκατάστασης
- Εξωτερική Μονάδα
Βήμα 1. Επιλέξτε τοποθεσία εγκατάστασης
Πριν εγκαταστήσετε την εξωτερική μονάδα, πρέ-
πει να επιλέξετε τη κατάλληλη θέση. Οι ακόλου-
θες προδιαγραφές θα σας βοηθήσουν να επιλέξε-
τε μια κατάλληλη τοποθεσία για τη μονάδα.
Οι κατάλληλες τοποθεσίες εγκατάστασης συ-
ναντούν τις ακόλουθες προδιαγραφές:
o
Συναντούν όλες τις προϋποθέσεις όπως
φαίνεται στις Προδιαγραφές Χώρου
Εγκατάστασης (Σχ. 4.1)
o
Καλή ανακυκλοφορία του αέρα και εξαέρωση
o
Σταθερή και στιβαρή τοποθεσία για αποφυγή
κραδασμών
o
Ο θόρυβος της μονάδας δεν θα ενοχλεί τους
παρευρισκόμενους
o
Προστατεύεται από μεγάλες περιόδους έκθεσης
στην ηλιακή ακτινοβολία ή τη βροχή.
ΜΗΝ εγκαθιστάτε στις ακόλουθες τοποθεσίες:
Κοντά σε εμπόδια που θα παρεμποδίσουν τον
αέρα να εισέλθει και να εξέλθει
Κοντά σε ζώα ή φυτά που μπορεί να τραυμα-
τιστούν από τον ζεστό αέρα που αποβάλλεται
Κοντά σε κάθε είδους εύφλεκτη πηγή
Σε περιοχές που αποβάλλεται μεγάλη ποσότητα
σκόνης
Σε περιοχή όπου υπάρχει μεγάλη ποσότητα
άλατος στον αέρα.
αριστερά
επάνω
μπροστά
από τον
τοίχο
δεξιά
Σχ. 4.1
Σελίδα 21
Page 20
.5
)ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
30cm (12in)
200cm (79in)
30cm (12in)
Fig. 4.1
Page 21
(A) (B)
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.4
Δυνατός
άνεμος
Δυνατός
άνεμος
Οπή στη βάση της
εξωτερικής μονάδας
Τσιμούχα
Τσιμούχα
Σύνδεσμος
Δυνατός
άνεμος
Μείωση
ανέμου
ΕΙΔΙΚΕΣ ΣΥΝΘΗΚΕΣ ΓΙΑ ΕΝΤΟΝΑ
ΚΑΙΡΙΚΑ ΦΑΙΝΟΜΕΝΑ
Αν η μονάδα εκτίθεται σε έντονο άνεμο: Εγκα-
ταστήστε τη μονάδα έτσι ώστε η έξοδος ανεμι-
στήρα να είναι υπό γωνία 90ο στη κατεύ- θυν-
ση του ανεμιστήρα. Αν χρειαστεί, φτιάξτε ένα
φράγμα μπροστά από τη μονάδα ώστε να τη
προστατέψετε από τον ισχυρό άνεμο.
Δείτε Σχ. 4.2 και Σχ. 4.3 παρακάτω.
Εάν ο σύνδεσμος φέρει λαστιχένια τσιμούχα
(Δείτε Σχ. 4.4-Α), κάντε τα ακόλουθα:
1. Προσαρμόστε τη λαστιχένια τσιμούχα στο
τέλος του συνδέσμου αποστράγγισης που
ενώνεται με την εξωτερική μονάδα.
2. Τοποθετήστε τον σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης
στην οπή της βάσης της μονάδας.
3. Περιστρέψτε τον σύνδεσμο κατά 90ο μέχρι να
ακού- σετε το κλικ στο μπροστινό μέρος της
μονάδας.
4. Ενώστε προέκταση του αγωγού αποστράγγισης
(δεν συμπεριλαμβάνεται) στον σύνδεσμο
αποστράγγισης ώστε να στρέψετε τη ροή του
νερού από τη μονάδα κατά τη διάρκεια της
λειτουργίας θέρμανσης.
Αν ο σύνδεσμος αποστράγγισης δεν φέρει λα-
στιχένια τσιμούχα (Δείτε Σχ. 4.4 -Β), κάντε τα
ακόλουθα:
1. Τοποθετήστε αγωγό αποστράγγισης στη τρύπα
στη βάση της μονάδας. Ο σύνδεσμος αποστρά-
γγισης πρέπει να κουμπώσει στη βάση.
2. Ενώστε την προέκταση του αγωγού αποστρά-
γγισης (δεν συμπεριλαμβάνεται) με τον
σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης ώστε να στρέψετε
το νερό από τη μονάδα κατά τη διάρκεια της
λειτουργίας θέρμανσης.
ΣΕ ΠΑΓΕΡΕΣ ΚΛΙΜΑΤΙΚΕΣ
ΣΥΝΘΗΚΕΣ
Σε παγερές συνθήκες περιβάλλοντος, βεβαιώ-
στε ότι ο αγωγός αποστράγγισης είναι κάθε-
τος όσο το δυνατόν περισσότερο ώστε να εξα-
σφαλίσετε την αλλαγή στο νερό αποστράγγι-
σης. Αν η απο- στράγγιση του νερού γίνεται
πολύ αργά, μπορεί να παγώσει στη τρύπα και
να υπερχειλίσει τη μονάδα.
Σχ. 4.3
Σχ. 4.2
Σχ. 4.4
Αν η μονάδα συχνά εκτίθεται σε έντονη
βροχόπτωση ή χιονιά:
Φτιάξτε ένα ράφι πάνω από τη μονάδα ώστε να
τη προστατεύει από βροχή και χιόνι. Προσέξ-
τε να μην εμποδίζετε τον αέρα γύρω από τη μο-
νάδα.
Αν η μονάδα εκτίθετε συχνά σε αέρα με
ποσότητα άλατος (παραθαλάσσια):
Χρησιμοποιήστε εξωτερική μονάδα που είναι
ειδικά σχεδιασμένη για να αποφεύγεται η διά-
βρωση.
Βήμα 2: Εγκαταστήστε τον σύνδεσμο
αποστράγγισης
Μονάδες αντλιών θερμότητας προϋποθέτου σύν-
δεσμο αποστράγγισης. Πριν βιδώσετε την εξωτε-
ρική μονάδα στη βάση, πρέπει να εγκαταστή- σετε
τον σύνδεσμο αποστράγγισης στο κάτω μέρος της
μονάδας. Σημειώστε ότι υπάρχουν δυο διαφο- ρε-
τικοί τύποι συνδέσμων αποστράγγισης που εξαρ-
τώνται από τον τύπο της εξωτερικής μονάδας.
Σελίδα 22
Page 22
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Fig. 4.5
W x H x D
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Bήμα 3: Στερεώστε την εξωτερική
μονάδα
Η εξωτερική μονάδα μπορεί να στερεω-
θεί στο έδαφος ή σε επιτοίχιο βραχίονα.
ΔΙΑΣΤΑΣΕΙΣ ΕΞΩΤΕΡΙΚΗΣ
ΜΟΝΑΔΑΣ
Τα ακόλουθα είναι μια λίστα από δια-
φορετικές διαστάσεις εξωτερικών μο-
νάδων και αποστάσεις μεταξύ
των επιτοίχιων μονάδων. Προετοιμά-
στε την βάση εγκατάστασης
της μονάδας σύμφωνα με τις ακόλου-
θες διαστάσεις.
Αν θα εγκαταστήσετε τη μονάδα στο έδαφος ή σε
βάση σκυροδέματος, κάντε τα ακόλουθα:
1. Προσδιορίστε τις θέσεις των τεσσάρων βιδών
σύμφωνα με τις διαστάσεις που υπάρχουν
στον πίνακα με τις διαστάσεις της Επιτοίχιας
Μονάδας. 2. Προσχεδιάστε το άνοιγμα οπών
για τα βύσματα προέκτασης
3. Απομακρύνετε τη σκόνη που προέρχεται από
το σκυρόδεμα μακριά από τις οπές.
4. Τοποθετήστε ένα παξιμάδι στο τέλος κάθε
βίδας.
5. Καρφώστε τα βύσματα προέκτασης στις
προσχεδιασμένες οπές.
6. Αφαιρέστε τα παξιμάδια από τα βύσματα
προέκτασης και τοποθετήστε την εξωτερική
μονάδα στις βίδες.
7. Τοποθετήστε ροδέλες σε κάθε βύσμα προέκτασης
και μετά αντικαταστήστε τα παξιμάδια.
8. Χρησιμοποιώντας γαλλικό κλειδί, σφίξτε κάθε
παξιμάδι μέχρι να κουμπώσει.
Είσοδος Αέρα
W
Είσοδος
Αέρα
Έξοδος αέρα
Διαστάσεις εξωτερικής μονάδας (mm)
Απόσταση A (mm/in) Απόσταση Β (mm/in)
Διαστάσεις επιτοίχιας μονάδας
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΟΤΑΝ ΤΡΥΠΑΤΕ ΣΕ ΣΚΥΡΟΔΕΜΑ,
ΠΡΟΣΤΑΤΕΨΤΕ ΤΑ ΜΑΤΙΑ ΚΑΘΟΛΗ ΤΗ
ΔΙΑΡΚΕΙΑ.
Σχ. 4.5
Σελίδα 23
Page 22
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Fig. 4.5
W x H x D
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Page 23
Αν εγκαταστήσετε την μονάδα σε επιτοίχιο
βραχίονα, κάντε τα ακόλουθα:
1. Προσδιορίστε τις θέσεις των βραχιόνων
σύμφωνα με τις διαστάσεις που υπάρχουν
στον πίνακα με τις διαστάσεις της Επιτοίχιας
Μονάδας.
2. Προετοιμάστε τις οπές για τα βύσματα
προέκτασης.
3. Απομακρύνετε τη σκόνη και τα χαλάσματα
μακριά από τις οπές.
4. Τοποθετήστε ένα παξιμάδι στο τέλος κάθε
βίδας.
5. Περάστε τα βύσματα προέκτασης μέσα
από τις οπές στους επιτοίχιους βραχίονες,
τοποθετήστε τους επιτοίχιους βραχίονες στη
κατάλληλη θέση και καρφώστε τα βύσματα
προέκτασης στον τοίχο.
6. Ελέγξτε ότι τοποθετήθηκαν σωστά οι επιτοίχιοι
βραχίονες.
7. Προσεκτικά σηκώστε τη μονάδα και
τοποθετήστε τα στηρίγματα της μονάδας
πάνω στους βραχίονες. 8. Βιδώστε τη μονάδα
ακριβώς στους βραχίονες.
ΜΕΙΩΣΤΕ ΤΟΥΣ ΚΡΑΔΑΣΜΟΥΣ
ΣΤΗΝ ΕΠΙΤΟΙΧΙΑ ΜΟΝΑΔΑ
Αν επιτρέπετε, μπορείτε να εγκαταστήσετε την
επιτοίχια μονάδα με λαστιχένιους συνδέσμους
ώστε να μειώσετε τους κραδασμούς και τον θό-
ρυβο.
Βήμα 4: Συνδέστε τα καλώδια σήματος και
ρεύματος
Το τερματικό τμήμα της εξωτερικής μονάδας προ-
στατεύεται από ένα κάλυμμα καλωδίου στο πλά-
γιο μέρος της μονάδας. Ένα γενικό διάγραμμα κα-
λωδιώσεων είναι τυπωμένο στο εσωτερικό μέρος
του καλύμματος καλωδίων.
ΠΡΙΝ ΠΡΑΓΜΑΤΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΤΕ
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΕΡΓΑΣΙΕΣ,
ΔΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΤΙΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΕΣ
1. Όλες οι καλωδιώσεις θα πρέπει να είναι
σύμφωνες με τους τοπικούς και εθνικούς
ηλεκτρολογικούς κανονισμούς και θα πρέπει
να εγκαθιστώνται από εξουσιοδοτημένο
ηλεκτρολόγο.
2. Όλες οι ηλεκτρολογικές συνδέσεις πρέπει
να γίνουν σύμφωνα με το Διάγραμμα
Ηλεκτρολογικών Συνδέσεων που βρίσκεται
στη μεριά των πάνελ της εξωτερικής και
εσωτερικής μονάδας.
3. Αν υπάρχει σοβαρό θέμα ασφάλειας με τη
παροχή ρεύματος, σταματήστε τη λειτουργία
αμέσως. Εξηγήστε τους λόγους στον πελάτη
και αρνηθείτε να πραγματοποιήσετε την
εγκατάσταση μέχρι να αποκατασταθεί το
πρόβλημα.
4. Η τάση του ρεύματος πρέπει να είναι μεταξύ
90-100% της βαθμονομημένης τάσης.
Ανεπαρκής παροχή ρεύματος μπορεί να
προκαλέσει ηλεκτροπληξία ή φωτιά.
5. Αν συνδέσετε με το ρεύμα τις καλωδιώσεις,
βάλτε διάταξη προστασίας υπέρτασης και
ασφαλειοδιακόπτη με χωρητικότητα 1.5
φορά παραπάνω από αυτή που λειτουργεί
κανονικά η μονάδα.
6. Αν συνδέσετε με ρεύμα τις καλωδιώσεις,
ένας διακόπτης ή ασφαλειοδιακόπτης που
αποσυνδέει όλους τους πόλους και έχει
διαχωριστική επαφή τουλάχιστον 1/8in
(3mm) πρέπει να είναι ενσωματωμένα στο
ηλεκτρολογικό κύκλωμα. Ένας εξειδικευ-
μένος τεχνικός πρέπει να χρησιμοποιήσει
έναν ενδεικνυμένο ασφαλειοδιακόπτη ή
διακόπτη.
7. Συνδέστε τη μονάδα σε ξεχωριστή πρίζα.
Μην συνδέετε άλλες συσκευές στην ίδια
πρίζα.
8. Βεβαιωθείτε η μονάδα είναι γειωμένη σωστά.
9. Κάθε καλώδιο θα πρέπει να είναι σωστά
συνδεδεμένο. Ελλειπής σύνδεση μπορεί να
προκαλέσει υπερθέρμανση που οδηγεί σε
δυσλειτουργία της μονάδας και σε πιθανή
φωτιά.
10. ΜΗΝ αφήνετε τις επαφές των καλωδίων
εκτεθειμένες στον αγωγό του ψυκτικού
μέσου, στον συμπιε- στή ή σε οποιοδήποτε
κινητό μέρος μέσα στη μονάδα. 11. Αν η
μονάδα έχει βοηθητική ηλεκτρική θέρμανση,
πρέπει να εγκατασταθεί τουλάχιστον σε 1
μέτρο (40in) μακριά από εύφλεκτα υλικά.
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
Πριν την εγκατάσταση της επιτοίχιας μονά-
δας, βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο τοίχος είναι φτιαγμέ-
νος από συμπαγή τούβλα, σκυρόδεμα ή όμοια
στιβαρά υλικά. Ο τοίχος πρέπει να είναι ικα-
νός να υποστηρίξει τουλάχιστον τέσσερις φο-
ρές το βάρος της μονάδας.
Σελίδα 24
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
Page 24
Fig. 4.6
1. Προετοιμάστε το καλώδιο για σύνδεση:
ΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΠΟΙΗΣΤΕ ΤΟ ΣΩΣΤΟ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟ
Εσωτερικό καλώδιο τροφοδοσίας (αν
εφαρμόζεται): H05VV-F ή H05V2V2-F
Εξωτερικό καλώδιο τροφοδοσίας: H07RN-F
Καλώδιο Σήματος: H07RN-F
Ελάχιστη Διατομή Καλωδίων
Τροφοδοσίας και Σήματος
Βόρεια Αμερική
α. Χρησιμοποιόντας πένσα απογυμνώστε τα
καλώδια στις δυο άκρες για 15cm (6in) ώστε
να εκτεθούν τα εσωτερικά καλώδια
β. Μονώστε τις άκρες των καλωδίων.
γ. Χρησιμοποιήστε σφιγκτήρα καλωδίου
και σφίξτε τις συνδέσεις στις άκρες των
καλωδίων.
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Τάση
Συσκευής (Α) AWG
> 3 6
> 6 101
> 10 161
> 16 252
> 25 324
> 32 406
0,75
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
și
și
și
și
și
și
Άλλες Περιοχές
Τάση
Συσκευής (Α)
Διατομή Καλωδίου
(mm2)
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ΠΡΙΝ ΞΕΚΙΝΗΣΕΤΕ ΟΠΟΙΑΔΗΠΟΤΕ
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΝΙΚΗ ΚΑΙ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΗ
ΔΙΕΡΓΑΣΙΑ, ΑΠΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΤΕ ΤΗ ΚΥΡΙΑ
ΤΡΟΦΟΔΟΣΙΑ ΤΟΥ ΣΥΣΤΗΜΑΤΟΣ.
Το Διάγραμμα Ηλεκτρολογικού
Κυκλώματος Εξωτερικής Μονάδας είναι
τοποθετημένο εσωτερικά του καλύμματος
καλωδίωσης της εξωτερικής μονάδας.
Κάλυμμα
ΠΡΟΣΕΞΤΕ ΤΟ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΟ ΦΑΣΗΣ
Όταν πιέζετε τα καλώδια, βεβαιωθείτε ότι
έχετε ξεκαθαρίσει το καλώδιο φάσης από τα
υπόλοιπα καλώδια.
ΟΛΕΣ ΟΙ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΕΙΣ ΘΑ ΠΡΕΠΕΙ ΝΑ
ΑΚΟΛΟΥΘΟΥΝ ΑΥΣΤΗΡΑ ΤΟ ΔΙΑΓΡΑΜΜΑ
ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΕΩΝ ΠΟΥ ΒΡΙΣΚΕΤΑΙ ΜΕΣΑ ΣΤΟ
ΚΑΛΥΜΜΑ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΝ ΤΗΣ ΕΞΩΤΕΡΙΚΗΣ
ΜΟΝΑΔΑΣ.
2. Ξεβιδώστε το κάλυμμα ηλεκτρολογικού
καλωδίου και απομακρύντε το.
3. Ξεβιδώστε τον σφιγκτήρα καλωδίων κάτω από
το τερματικό και τοποθετήστε το στη πλαϊνή
πλευρά.
4. Ταιριάξτε τα χρώματα των καλωδίων/
ταμπελάκια με τα ταμπελάκια στο τερματικό
και βιδώστε με ακρίβεια τις συνδέσεις κάθε
καλωδίου στην αντίστοιχη υποδοχή
5. Αφότου ελέγξετε για επιβεβαίωση ότι κάθε
σύνδεση είναι ασφαλής, τυλίξτε τα καλώδια
ώστε να αποφύγετε πτώση νερού μέσα στις
υποδοχές.
6. Χρησιμοποιώντας τον σφιγκτήρα καλωδίων,
δέστε το καλώδιο στη μονάδα. Βιδώστε
τον σφιγκτήρα κάτω γερά. 7. Μονώστε τα
αχρησιμοποίητα καλώδια με PVC ταινία.
Ταξινομήστε τα έτσι ώστε να μην ακουμπούν
τα ηλεκτρικά ή τα μεταλλικά μέρη.
8. Αντικαταστήστε το κάλυμμα καλωδίων στη
πλευρά της μονάδας και βιδώστε το.
Σχ. 4.6
Σελίδα 25
Page 24
Fig. 4.6
Page 25
6
90°
Fig. 5.1
< 15,000 25 (82ft) 10 (33ft)
15,000 < 24,000 30 (98.5ft) 20 (66ft)
24,000 < 36,000 50 (164ft) 25 (82ft)
36,000 60,000 65 (213ft) 30 (98.5ft)
Σύνδεση αγωγού ψυκτικού μέσου
R410A Inverter Split Air
Conditioner
Πλάγια Ανώμαλα Παραμορφωμένα
Οδηγίες Σύνδεσης
- Αγωγός Ψυκτικού Μέσου
Βήμα 1: Κόψτε τους αγωγούς
Όταν ετοιμάζετε τους αγωγούς ψυκτικού μέσου,
δώστε παραπάνω προσοχή να τους κόψετε και να
τους εκχειλώσετε σωστά. Αυτό θα σας εξασφαλί-
σει αποδοτική λειτουργία και μειώνει την ανάγκη
για μελλοντική συντήρηση. Για τα μοντέλα με
R32/R290, τα σημεία σύνδεσης των αγωγών
θα πρέπει να βρίσκονται εξωτερικά του δω-
ματίου.
1. Μετρήστε την απόσταση μεταξύ της
εσωτερικής και εξωτερικής μονάδας.
Μοντέλο Απόδοση (BTU/h) Lungime max. (m) Înălțime maximă de
cădere (m)
și
și
și
2. Χρησιμοποιώντας κοπτικό, κόψτε τον αγωγό
λίγο παραπάνω από τη μετρημένη απόσταση.
3. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο αγωγός είναι κομμένος σε
τέλεια 90ο γωνία.
Ανατρέξτε στο Σχ. 5.1 για κακή κοπή των αγωγών.
Σημείωση στο Μήκος του Αγωγού
Το μήκος του αγωγού ψυκτικού μέσου θα επηρεάσει την λειτουργία και την ενεργειακή απόδοση της μο-
νάδας. Η εικονική απόδοση είναι ελεγμένη στις μονάδες με μήκος αγωγού 5 μέτρων (16.5ft). Το ελάχι-
στο μήκος του αγωγού θα πρέπει να είναι 3 μέτρα ώστε να εξασφαλίζεται η αποτροπή κραδασμών και
ο έντονος θόρυβος. Σε ειδικές περιπτώσεις, το μέγιστο μήκος του αγωγού του ψυκτικού υγρού δεν θα
πρέπει να ξεπερνά τα 10 μέτρα (32.8ft) και η προσθήκη ψυκτικού ΔΕΝ επιτρέπεται (αναφορά στα μοντέ-
λα με R290 ψυκτικό μέσο).
Ανατρέξτε στο παρακάτω πίνακα για λεπτομέρειες στο μέγιστο μήκος και δώστε ύψος στον αγωγό
Μέγιστο Μήκος και Ύψος Αγωγού Ψυκτικού Μέσου για κάθε Μοντέλο Μονάδας
Σχ. 5.1
Σελίδα 26
Page 26
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
A (mm)
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
A
Fig. 5.5
ΜΗΝ ΠΑΡΑΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΕ
ΤΟΝ ΑΓΩΓΟ ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗ ΚΟΠΗ
Να είστε ιδιαίτερα προσεκτικοί να μην κα-
ταστρέψετε, λυγίσετε ή παραμορφώσετε τον
αγωγό κατά τη διάρκεια κοπής. Αυτό μπορεί
δραστικά να μειώσει την απόδοση θέρμανσης
της μονάδας.
Βήμα 2: Απαλλαγείτε από τα βουητά
Τα γρέζια μπορεί να επηρεάσουν την αεροστεγή
σύνδεση του πώματος στον αγωγό ψυκτικού μέ-
σου. Πρέπει να αφαιρεθούν τελείως.
1. Κρατήστε τον αγωγό σε κατακόρυφη κλίση
ώστε να αποφύγετε την εισχώρηση των
γρεζιών στον αγωγό.
2. Χρησιοποιώντας γλείφανο ή εργαλείο
λέιανσης, απομακρύνετε όλα τα γρέζια από το
κομμένο τμήμα του αγωγού.
Βήμα 3: Εκχείλωση των άκρων του αγωγού
Σωστή εκχείλωση είναι απαραίτητη ώστε να
πραγματοποιηθεί αεροστεγές κλείσιμο.
1. Αφότου αφαιρέσετε τα γρέζια από τον κομμένο
αγωγό, καλύψτε τις άκρες με πλαστική ταινία
ώστε να αποφύγετε την εισχώρησή τους στον
αγωγό.
2. Τυλίξτε τον αγωγό με μονωτικό υλικό.
3. Τοποθετήστε παξιμάδια και στις δύο
απολήξεις των αγωγών. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι έχουν
τοποθετηθεί με τη σωστή κατεύθυνση. Δείτε
Σχ. 5.3.
Αγωγός
Γλείφανο
Κατεύθυνση
προς τα κάτω
Παξιμάδι Εκχείλωσης
Χαλκοσωλήνας
Αγωγός
Φόρμα
Εκχείλωσης
4. Αφαιρέστε τη πλαστική μονωτική ταινία από
τις απολήξεις των αγωγών όταν είστε έτοιμοι
να ξεκινήσετε τη διαδικασία καύσης.
5. Σχηματίζετε φλόγα στο άκρο του σωλήνα. Το
άκρο του σωλήνα πρέπει να εκτείνεται πέρα
της φλόγας σύμφωνα με τις διαστάσεις που
φαίνονται στον παρακάτω πίνακα.
Εξωτερική
Διάμετρος Αγωγού
(mm) Ελάχιστη Μέγιστη
ΕΠΕΚΤΑΣΗ ΑΓΩΓΟΥ ΠΕΡΑΝ ΤΟΥ ΠΑΞΙΜΑΔΙΟΥ
Σχ. 5.3
Σχ. 5.5
Σχ. 5.4
Σχ. 5.2
Σελίδα 27
Page 26
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
A (mm)
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
A
Fig. 5.5
Page 27
≥10cm (4in)
Fig. 5.6
Fig. 5.7
Fig. 5.8
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 1,500 (11lbft) 1,600 (11.8lbft)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 2,500 (18.4lbft) 2,600 (19.18lbft)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 3,500 (25.8lb•ft) 3,600 (26.55lb•ft)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
4,500 (33.19lb•ft)
6,500 (47.94lb•ft)
4,700 (34.67lb•ft)
6,700 (49.42lb•ft)
Ακτίνα
6. Τοποθετήστε το εργαλείο εκχείλωσης μέσα στη
φόρμα.
7. Γυρίστε το εργαλείο εκχείλωσης με φορά
ρολογιού, μέχρι να πραγματοποιηθεί η
εκχείλωση.
8. Αφαιρέστε το εργαλείο εκχείλωσης και τη
φόρμα αυτού, μετά εξετάστε τις άκρες του
αγωγού για ραγίσματα και ανοίγματα.
Βήμα 4: Ενώστε τους αγωγούς
Όταν ενώνετε τους αγωγούς του ψυκτικού μέσου,
προσέξτε να μην ασκήσετε υπερβολική ροπή ή να
μην παραμορφώσετε τον αγωγό για οποιοδήπο-
τε λόγο. Θα πρέπει αρχικά να συνδέσετε τον αγωγό
χαμιλής πίεσης και μετά τον αγωγό υψηλής πίεσης.
Εξωτερική Διάμετρος
Αγωγού (mm)
Ροπή Στρέψης
(N/cm)
Επιπρόσθετη ροπή
σύσφιξης (N/m)
ΠΡΟΫΠΟΘΕΣΕΙΣ ΣΤΡΕΨΗΣ
ΕΛΑΧΙΣΤΗ ΑΚΤΙΝΑ ΛΥΓΙΣΜΑΤΟΣ
Όταν λυγίζετε τον αγωγό σύνδεσης ψυκτι-
κού μέσου, η ελάχιστη ακτίνα λυγίσματος
είναι 10cm. Δείτε Σχ. 5.6
Οδηγίες για Σύνδεση του Αγωγού στην
Εσωτερική Μονάδα
Αγωγός
Εσωτερικής
Μονάδας
Αγωγός
ΜΗΝ ΑΣΚΕΙΤΕ ΠΑΡΑΠΑΝΩ ΡΟΠΗ
Παραπάνω ροπή μπορεί να σπάσει το παξιμάδι ή να καταστρέψει τον αγωγό ψυκτικού
μέσου. Πρέπει να μην ξεπερνάτε τις αρχές ροπής που φαίνονται στο παραπάνω πίνακα.
Σχ. 5.6
Σχ. 5.7
Σχ. 5.8
Παξιμάδι
Επιμήκυνσης
1. Ευθυγραμμίστε στο κέντρο τους δυο αγωγούς
που θέλετε να συνδέσετε. Δείτε Σχ. 5.7 .
2. Σφίξτε το παξιμάδι επιμήκυνσης όσο σφιχτά
μπορείτε με το χέρι.
3. Χρησιμοποιήστε γερμανικό κλειδί, σφίξτε
το παξιμάδι επιμήκυνσης στον αγωγό της
μονάδας.
4. Όταν σφίγγετε γερά το παξιμάδι στον αγωγό
της μονάδας, χρησιμοποιήστε κλειδί στρέψης
ώστε να σφίξετε τα παξιμάδια σύμφωνα
με τις αρχές σύσφιξης των Προδιαγραφών
Στρέψης όπως φαίνεται στον παρακάτω
πίνακα. Χαλαρώστε ελαφρώς τα παξιμάδια,
μετά σφίξτε ξανά.
Σελίδα 28
Page 28
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
5. Ενώ κρατάτε το σώμα της βαλβίδας,
χρησιμοποιήστε μηχανικό κλειδί ασφαλείας να
σφίξετε το παξιμάδι σύμφωνα με της αρχές του
μηχανικού κλειδιού.
6. Χαλαρώστε το παξιμάδι επιμήκυνσης ελαφρώς,
μετά σφίξτε ξανά.
7. Επαναλάβετε τα Βήματα 3 έως 6 για τον αγωγό
που έχει απομείνει.
ΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΠΟΙΗΣΤΕ ΓΕΡΜΑΝΙΚΟ
ΚΛΕΙΔΙ ΓΙΑ ΝΑ ΚΡΑΤΗΣΕΤΕ
ΤΟ ΣΩΜΑ ΤΗΣ ΒΑΛΒΙΔΑΣ
Η ροπή από την εκχείλωση μπορεί να
προκαλέσει φθορά ή να κόψει τμήμα της
βαλβίδας
Κάλυμμα
βαλβίδας
Σχ. 5.9
Σχ. 5.10
Οδηγίες Σύνδεσης Αγωγού
στην Εξωτερική Μονάδα
1. Ξεβιδώστε το κάλυμμα από τη πλακέτα της
εξωτερικής μονάδας. (Δείτε Σχ. 5.9)
2. Αφαιρέστε τα προστατευτικά πώματα από κάθε
βαλβίδα.
3. Ευθυγραμμίστε τις άκρες των αγωγών με τις
βαλβίδες και σφίξτε τα παξιμάδια επιμήκυνσης
όσο πιο πολύ μπορείτε χειροκίνητα.
4. Χρησιμοποιώντας γερμανικό κλειδί, κρατήστε
το σώμα της βαλβίδας. Μην κρατάτε το
παξιμάδι που καλύπτει τη βαλβίδα
Σελίδα 29
Page 28
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
Page 29
.7
-76cmHg
MC MC
Fig. 6.1
Εξαέρωση
Προεργασία και Οδηγίες
Αέρας και άλλα ξένα στοιχεία στο ψυκτικό κύκλο
μπορεί να προκαλέσουν ασυνήθιστη αύξηση στη
πίεση, το οποίο μπορεί να καταστρέψει το κλιμα-
τιστικό, να μειώσει την απόδοσή του και να προ-
καλέσει τραυματισμούς. Χρησιμοποιήστε αντλία
κενού να εξαερώσετε το ψυκτικό κύκλο, αποβάλ-
λοντας κάθε μη εύφλεκτο αέριο και υγρασία από
το σύστημα
Η εξαέρωση θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται κατά
την αρχική εγκατάσταση και όταν η μονάδα μετα-
κινείται σε άλλο μέρος.
ΠΡΙΝ ΠΡΑΓΜΑΤΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΤΕ
ΤΗΝ ΕΞΑΕΡΩΣΗ
o
Ελέγξτε ότι και η υψηλή και η χαμηλή πίεση
των αγωγών μεταξύ εσωτερικής και εξωτε- ρι-
κής μονάδας είναι συνδεδεμένες σε πλήρη συμ-
φωνία με την ενότητα Σύνδεση Αγωγών Ψυκτι-
κού Μέσου αυτού του εγχειριδίου.
o
Ελέγξτε ότι όλες οι καλωδιώσεις είναι συνδε-
δεμένες σωστά.
Οδηγίες Εξαέρωσης
Πριν χρησιμοποιήσετε τη βαλβίδα πολλαπλής
και την αντλία κενού, διαβάστε τα εγχειρίδια λει-
τουργίας.
1. Συνδέστε τον αγωγό φόρτισης της βαλβίδας
πολλαπλής στο άκρο φόρτισης της βαλβίδας
χαμηλής πίεσης της εξωτερικής μονάδας.
2. Συνδέστε τον αγωγό φόρτισης της βαλβίδας
πολλαπλής στην αντλία κενού.
3. Ανοίξτε τη πλευρά Χαμηλής Πίεσης της
πολλαπλής βαλβίδας. Κρατήστε τη πλευρά
Υψηλής Πίεσης κλειστή.
4. Ενεργοποιήστε την αντλία κενού ώστε να
εξαερώσετε το σύστημα.
5. Ενεργοποιήστε την αντλία κενού για
τουλάχιστον 15 λεπτά ή έως ότου η ένωση των
μετρήσεων δείξει -76cmHG (-105Pa).
Βαλβίδα Πολλαπλής
Μανόμετρο
Υψηλής πίεσης Βαλβίδα
Αγωγός φόρτισης
Αντλία κενού
Βαλβίδα χαμηλής πίεσης
Πολύμετρο
Χαμηλής πίεσης
Βαλβίδα
Αγωγός Φόρτισης
Αγωγός Πίεσης
Σχ. 6.1
Σελίδα 30
Page 30
Fig. 6.2
N/A
6. Κλέιστε τη πλευρά Χαμηλής Θέρμανσης της
πολλαπλής βαλβίδας και απενεργοποιήστε την
αντλία κενού.
7. Αναμείνετε για 5 λεπτά, μετά ελέγξτε ότι δεν
υπάρχει αλλαγή στη πίεση του συστήματος.
8. Αν υπάρχει αλλαγή στη πίεση του συστήματος,
ανα- τρέξτε στην ενότητα Έλεγχος Διαρροής
Ρευστού για πληροφορίες σχετικές με το πώς
ελέγχουμε για τυχόν διαρροή. Αν δεν υπάρχει
αλλαγή στη πίεση του συστήματος, ξεβιδώστε
το πώμα από την βαλβίδα υψηλής πίεσης.
9. Βάλτε το εξάγωνο κλειδί στη βαλβίδα (υψηλής
πίεσης) και ανοίξτε τη βαλβίδα γυρνώντας το
κλειδί σε 1/4 περιστροφή δεικτών ρολογιού.
Ακούστε το αέριο να αποβάλλεται από το
σύστημα και μετά από 5 δευτερόλεπτα κλείστε
τη βαλβίδα.
10. Παρατηρήστε το Μανόμετρο Πίεσης για
ένα λεπτό να βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν υπάρχει
αλλαγή στη πίεση. Το μανό-- μετρο θα πρέπει
να δείχνει τιμή ελάχιστα υψηλότερη της
ατμοσφαιρικής πίεσης.
11. Αφαιρέστε τον αγωγό τροφοδοσίας από τη
θύρα επισκευής.
Σημείωση στη Προσθήκη Ψυκτικού Υγρού
Ορισμένα συστήματα προϋποθέτουν παραπάνω πρόσθεση ψυκτικού μέσου σύμφωνα με τα μήκη των
αγωγών. Το κανονικό μήκος αγωγών ποικίλει σύμφωνα με τους τοπικούς κανονισμούς. Για παράδειγμα, στη
Νότια Αμερική, το κανονικό μήκος αγωγού είναι 7.5m (25’). Σε άλλες περιοχές, το κανονικό μήκος είναι 5m
(16’). Η προσθήκη του ψυκτικού υγρού θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται στη βαλβίδα χαμηλής πίεσης της
εξωτερικής μονάδας. Η προσθήκη ψυκτικού μπορεί να υπολογιστεί ακολουθώντας την παρακάτω φόρμα
12. Χρησιμοποιήστε εξάγωνο κλειδί και ανοίξτε
τέρμα και τις δυο βαλβίδες υψηλής και
χαμηλής πίεσης.
13. Σφίξτε και τις τρεις βαλβίδες (θύρα επισκευής,
υψηλής πίεσης χαμηλής πίεσης) χειροκίνητα.
Για παραπάνω σφίξιμο μπορείτε να
χρησιμποιήσετε μηχανικό κλειδί, αν χρειαστεί.
ΑΝΟΙΞΤΕ ΠΡΟΣΕΚΤΙΚΑ ΤΙΣ ΒΑΛΒΙΔΕΣ
ΠΡΟΣΘΗΚΗ ΨΥΚΤΙΚΟΥ ΜΕΣΟΥ ΓΙΑ ΚΑΘΕ ΜΗΚΟΣ ΑΓΩΓΟΥ
Όταν ανοίγετε τις βαλβίδες, γυρίστε το
εξάγωνο κλειδί μέχρι να τερματίσει. Μην
προσπαθήσετε να ασκήσετε παραπάνω
δύναμη για περισσότερο άνοιγμα
Παξιμάδι εκχείλωσης
Σώμα Βαλβίδας Βαλβίδα
Πώμα
Μήκος Αγωγού
Σύνδεσης (m)
Μέθοδος
Απομάκρυνσης
Αέρα
Προσθήκη Ψυκτικού Μέσου
Κανονικό μήκος
αγωγού
> Κανονικό
μήκος αγωγού
Αντλία
κενού
Γραμμή Ρευστού: Ø 6.35 (ø 0.25”)
R32:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 12g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.13oZ/ft
R290:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 10g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.10oZ/ft
R410A:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 15g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.16oZ/ft
Partea lichidă: Ø 9.52 0.375”)
R32:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 24g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.26oZ/ft
R290:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 18g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.19oZ/ft
R410A:
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 30g/m
(Μήκος Αγωγού- Κανονικό μήκος) x 0.32oZ/ft
Αντλία
κενού
Για μονάδες με R290 ψυκτικό υγρό, η μέγιστη ποσότητα επιπλέον ψυκτικού δεν μπορεί να είναι:
387g(<=9000Btu/h), 447g(>9000Btu/h και <=12000Btu/h), 547g(>12000Btu/h και <=18000Btu/h),
632g(>18000Btu/h και<=24000Btu/h).
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ ΜΗΝ αναμιγνύετε τύπους ψυκτικών μέσων.
Σχ. 6.2
Σελίδα 31
Page 30
Fig. 6.2
N/A
Page 31
.8
Έλεγχος Ηλεκτρολογικής Διαρροής
και Διαρροής Αερίου
Έλεγχος Ηλεκτρολογικής Ασφάλειας
Μετά την εγκατάσταση, επιβεβαιώστε ότι όλες οι
ηλεκτρολογικές καλωδιώσεις είναι σε πλήρη συμ-
φωνία με τις τοπικές και εθνικές προδιαγραφές
και σύμφωνα με το Εγχειρίδιο Εγκατάστασης.
ΠΡΙΝ ΤΗ ΔΟΚΙΜΑΣΤΙΚΗ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙΑ
Ελέγξτε τη καλωδίωση της γείωσης
Μετρήστε την αντίσταση της γείωσης με γυμνό
μάτι και με ελεγκτή αντίστασης γείωσης. Θα πρέ-
πει να είναι λιγότερο από 4.
Σημείωση: Αυτό μπορεί να μην είναι προϋπόθε-
ση για κάποιες περιοχές στην Αμερική.
ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗ ΔΙΑΡΚΕΙΑ ΔΟΚΙΜΑΣΤΙΚΗΣ
ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙΑΣ
Έλεγχος για Ηλεκτρολογική Διαρροή
Κατά τη διάρκεια της Δοκιμαστικής Λειτουργίας,
χρησιμοποιήστε δοκιμαστικό κατσαβίδι και πο-
λύ- μετρα να πραγματοποιήσετε έλεγχο διαρρο-
ής ρευστού.
Αν διαγνωθεί ηλεκτρολογική διαρροή, απενεργο-
ποιήστε τη μονάδα αμέσως και καλέστε εξουσιο-
δοτημένο ηλεκτρολόγο να βρείτε και να επιλύσε-
τε τα αίτια της διαρροής.
Σημείωση: Αυτό μπορεί να μην χρειάζεται σε κά-
ποιες περιοχές στην Αμερική.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ- ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ ΓΙΑ
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ
ΟΛΕΣ ΟΙ ΚΑΛΩΔΙΩΣΕΙΣ ΠΡΕΠΕΙ ΝΑ ΕΙΝΑΙ ΣΕ
ΠΛΗΡΗ ΣΥΜΦΩΝΙΑ ΜΕ ΤΟΥΣ ΤΟΠΙΚΟΥΣ ΚΑΙ
ΕΘΝΙΚΟΥΣ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΙΚΟΥΣ ΚΑΝΟΝΙΣΜΟΥΣ
ΚΑΙ ΘΑ ΠΡΕΠΕΙ ΝΑ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΘΟΥΝ ΑΠΟ
ΕΞΟΥΣΙΟΔΟΤΗΜΕΝΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΛΟΓΟ
Έλεγχος Διαρροής Αερίου
Υπάρχουν δυο διαφορετικοί τρόποι να ελέγξετε
για διαρροή ρευστού ή αερίου.
Μέθοδος με σαπούνι και νερό
Χρησιμοποιήστε μαλακή βούρτσα, εφαρμόστε σα-
πουνοδιάλυμα ή ουδέτερο απορρυπαντικό σε
όλα τα σημεία σύνδεσης των αγωγών στην εσωτε-
ρική και εξωτερική μονάδα. Αν εμφανιστούν φυ-
σαλίδες σημαίνει ότι υπάρχει διαρροή.
Μέθοδος Ανίχνευσης Διαρροής
Αν χρησιμοποιείτε ελεγκτή διαρροής, ανατρέξτε
στο εγχειρίδιο λειτουργίας του μηχανήματος για
περισσότερες λεπτομέρειες χρήσης.
ΑΦΟΤΟΥ ΠΡΑΓΜΑΤΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΤΕ
ΔΙΑΡΡΟΗ ΑΕΡΙΟΥ
Αφότου επιβεβαιώσετε ότι όλα τα σημεία σύν-
δεσης των αγωγών δεν παρουσιάζουν διαρροές,
αντικαταστήστε το κάλυμμα βαλβίδας στην εξω-
τερική μονάδα
Σελίδα 32
Page 32
9
ΔΟΚΙΜΑΣΤΙΚΗ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙΑ
Πριν τη Δοκιμαστική Λειτουργία
Πραγματοποιήστε δοκιμαστικό έλεγχο μόνο
αφότου έχετε ολοκληρώσει τα ακόλουθα βήμα-
τα:
• Έλεγχος Ασφαλείας Ηλεκτρικών:
Επιβεβαιώστε ότι το ηλεκτρολογικό σύστημα
της μονάδας είναι ασφαλές και λειτουργεί
σωστά.
• Έλεγχος Διαρροής Αερίου: Ελέγξτε τα
παξιμάδια επιμήκυνσης στις συνδέσεις των
αγωγών και επιβεβαι- ώστε ότι το σύστημα δεν
παρουσιάζει διαρροές.
• Επιβεβαιώστε ότι οι βαλβίδες αερίου και
ρευστού (υψηλή και χαμηλή πίεση) είναι
εντελώς ανοιχτές.
Οδηγίες Δοκιμαστικής Λειτουργίας
Θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιήσετε τη Δοκιμαστική
Λειτουργία για τουλάχιστον 30 λεπτά.
1. Συνδέστε τη μονάδα στο ρεύμα.
2. Πατήστε το κουμπί ON/OFF στο
τηλεχειριστήριο να το ενεργοποιήσετε.
3. Πατήστε το κουμπί MODE να περιγηθείτε στις
ακόλουθες λειτουργίες, μια τη φορά:
• ΨΥΞΗ- Επιλέξτε τη χαμηλότερη δυνατή
θερμοκρασία
• ΘΕΡΜΑΝΣΗ- Επιλέξτε την υψηλότερη δυνατή
θερμοκρασία
4. Αφήστε κάθε λειτουργία να πραγματοποιηθεί
για 5 λεπτά και πραγματοποιήστε τους
ακόλουθους ελέγχους:
Λίστα Πραγματοποίησης
Ελέγχων ΠΕΡΑΣΕ / ΑΠΕΤΥΧΕ
Δεν υπάρχει ηλεκτρολογική
διαρροή
Η μονάδα είναι σταθερά
εδραιωμένη
Όλες οι ηλεκτρολογικές απολήξεις
είναι σωστά καλυμμένες
Η εσωτερική και εξωτερική μονάδα
είναι σταθερά εγκατεστημένες.
Όλα τα σημεία σύνδεσης του
αγωγού δεν παρουσιάζουν
διαρροές
Το νερό αποστραγγίζεται επαρκώς
από τον αγωγό αποστράγγισης
Όλοι οι αγωγοί είναι επαρκώς
μονωμένοι
Η μονάδα πραγματοποιεί την
λειτουργία ΨΥΞΗΣ σωστά
Η μονάδα πραγματοποιεί την
λειτουργία ΘΕΡΜΑΝΣΗΣ σωστά
Οι εσωτερικές περσίδες
περιστρέφονται σωστά
Η εσωτερική μονάδα
ανταποκρίνεται στο
τηλεχειριστήριο
Εξωτερική
μονάδα
(2):
Εξωτερική
μονάδα
(2):
Σελίδα 33
Page 32
9
ΔΙΠΛΟΣ ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ ΣΥΝΔΕΣΗΣ ΑΓΩΓΟΥ
Κατά τη λειτουργία, η πίεση του ψυκτικού κύ-
κλου θα αυξηθεί. Αυτό μπορεί να προκαλέσει
διαρροή ρευστού που δεν υπήρχε στον αρχικό
έλεγχο διαρροών. Πάρτε χρόνο να ελέγξετε δι-
πλά πως όλα τα σημεία του αγωγού ψυκτικού
μέσου δεν έχουν διαρροές. Ανατρέ- ξτε στην
ενότητα Έλεγχος Διαρροής Ρευστού για οδηγίες.
5. Αφότου η Δοκιμαστική Λειτουργία
πραγματοποιηθεί με επιτυχία και
επιβεβαιώσετε ότι όλα τα σημεία στη
Λίστα Ελέγχου έχουν γίνει, ακολουθήστε τα
παρακάτω:
α. Χρησιμοποιήστε το τηλεχειριστήριο να
αλλάξετε τη θερμοκρασία της μονάδας σε
φυσιολογική.
β. Χρησιμοποιήστε μονωτική ταινία να τυλίξετε
τους εσωτερικούς αγωγούς του ψυκτικού
μέσου που μπορεί να αφήσατε ακάλυπτους
κατά τη διάρκεια εγκατάσταση της εσωτερικής
μονάδας.
ΑΝ Η ΘΕΡΜΟΚΡΑΣΙΑ ΔΩΜΑΤΙΟΥ ΕΙΝΑΙ
ΚΑΤΩ ΑΠΟ 17°C (63°F)
Δεν μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το τηλεχειρι-
στήριο να ενεργοποιήσετε τη λειτουργία ΨΥΞΗΣ
όταν τη θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος είναι κάτω
από 17°C.
Σε αυτή τη περίπτωση, μπορείτε να χρησιμο-
ποιήσετε το κουμπί MANUAL CONTROL ώστε να
ελέγξετε τη λειτουργία ΨΥΞΗΣ.
1. Ανασηκώστε τον μπροστινό πάνελ της
εσωτερικής μονάδας έως ότου ασφαλίσει στη
θέση του.
2. Η θέση του κουμπιού MANUAL CONTROL
είναι στη δεξιά πλευρά της μονάδας. Πιέστε
το πλήκτρο 2 φορές για να επιλέξετε τη
λειτουργία COOL. Δείτε Σχ. 8.1.
3. Πραγματοποιήστε φυσιολογικά την
Δοκιμαστική Λειτουργία.
Κουμπί Manual
Control
Σχ. 8.1
Page 33
Σελίδα 34
Page 34
.10
Ευρωπαϊκές Προδιαγραφές
Απόρριψης
Αυτή η συσκευή περιέχει ψυκτκό υγρό και άλλα πιθανώς επικίνδυνα υλικά. Όταν θέλετε να απορρίψε-
τε αυτή τη συσκευή, ο νόμος προϋποθέτει ειδική περισυλλογή και μεταχείριση. ΜΗΝ απορρίπτετε αυ-
τό το προϊόν όπως τα οικιακά ή δημοτικά απορρίματα.
Όταν απορρίπτετε αυτή τη συσκευή, ακολουθήστε τα παρακάτω:
• Απορρίψτε τη συσκευή στους ειδικά διαμορφωμένους ηλεκτρονικούς κάδους απόρριψης.
• Όταν αγοράζετε νέα συσκευή, ο έμπορος θα πάρει την παλιά συσκευή χωρίς χρέωση.
• Ο κατασκευαστής θα πάρει πίσω τη παλιά συσκευή χωρίς χρέωση.
• Πουλήστε τη συσκευή σε πιστοποιημένο έμπορο άχρηστων μετάλλων
Ειδική Σημείωση
Η απόρριψη αυτής της συσκευής στα δάση ή σε άλλα φυσικά περιβάλλοντα θέτει σε κίνδυνο την
υγεία και και είναι βλαβερή για το περιβάλλον. Επικίνδυνες ουσίες μπορεί να διαρρεύσουν στα υπό-
γεια ύδατα και να εισχωρήσουν στη τροφική αλυσίδα.
Page 35
11
Σελίδα 35
Page 34
.10
Page 35
11
Πληροφορίες Επισκευής
(Οι κλιματιστικές μονάδες υποχρεούνται να υιοθετήσουν
ψυκτικό υγρό R32/R290)
1. Έλεγχος στη περιοχή
Βασική προϋπόθεση για να ξεκινήσετε τις εργασίες σε συστήματα που περιέχουν εύφλεκτο ψυκτικό
υγρό, είναι ο έλεγχος για την αποτροπή πυρκαγιάς. Για την διαδικασία της επισκευής σε ψυκτικά κυ-
κλώματα, οι παρακάτω προφυλάξεις θα πρέπει να τηρούνται επακριβώς για την αποφυγή κινδύνων.
2. Διαδικασία Εργασιών
Θα πρέπει να υπάρχει μια αυστηρών ελέγχων διαδικασία ώστε να μην παρουσιαστούν εκκενώσεις αε-
ρίου ή ατμού.
3. Γενικές Προφυλάξεις
Όσοι εμπλέκονται με τη διαδικασία θα πρέπει να είναι πλήρως ενημερωμένοι για τις δικλείδες ασφα-
λείας και να ακολουθούν τις οδηγίες που προτείνονται κατά την επεξεργασία ψυκτικού κυκλώματος με
εύφλεκτο ψυκτικό υγρό.
4. Έλεγχος του ψυκτικού υγρού
Η περιοχή θα πρέπει να ελέγχεται με το ειδικό εργαλείο διάγνωσης ψυκτικού υγρού τόσο πριν τη δια-
δικασία όσο κατά τη διάρκεια, ώστε ο τεχνικός να αποκτήσει την απαραίτητη πληροφορία που χρειά-
ζεται αναφορικά με το ψυκτικό υγρό. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι χρησιμοποιείτε εξοπλισμό ανίχνευσης διαρροής
ψυκτικού μέσου κατάλληλο για εύφλεκτα ψυκτικά υγρά, π.χ. να μην πετάει σπινθήρες, να είναι πλήρως
στεγανωμένος ή πλήρως ασφαλής.
5. Πυροσβεστήρας
Κατά τις διαδικασίες συντήρησης ή επισκευής θα πρέπει απαραιτήτως να υπάρχει στον χώρο πυροσβε-
στήρας. Διασφαλίστε την ύπαρξη πυροσβεστήρα στον χώρο.
6. Εύφλεκτες πηγές
Τα άτομα που εμπλέκονται στη διαδικασία συντήρησης ή επισκευής και αναμυγνείονται με το ψυκτικό
κύκλωμα, δεν θα πρέπει να έρχονται σε επαφή με άλλου είδους εύφλεκτες πηγές προς αποφυγή πυρ-
καγιάς ή έκρηξης. Όλες οι πιθανές πηγές εύφλεκτων στοιχείων, όπως είναι ο καπνός τσιγάρου, θα πρέ-
πει να αποτρέπονται κατά τη διαδικασία εγκατάστασης, συντήρησης επισκευής, αφαίρεσης και απόρ-
ριψης. Βασική προτεραιότητα είναι να ελεγθεί ο χώρος και να διασφαλιστεί ότι δεν περιέχει εύφλεκτες
πηγές. Συστήνεται η τοποθέτηση σημάνσεων στον χώρο που πραγματοποιείται η διαδικασία, οι οποίες
θα προειδοποιούν ότι «ΑΠΑΓΟΡΕΥΕΤΑΙ ΤΟ ΚΑΠΝΙΣΜΑ».
7. Εξαέρωση
Θα πρέπει να εξασφαλίζεται ότι έχει γίνει η απαραίτητη εξαέρωση στον χώρο προτού προχωρήσει ο
αρμόδιος τεχνικός στην επεξεργασία του ψυκτικού κυκλώματος. Η εξαέρωση του χώρου θα πρέπει να
συνεχίζεται και κατά τη διάρκεια της διαδικασίας ούτως ώστε σε περίπτωση που υπάρξει διαρροή αε-
ρίου να απομακρύνεται άμεσα από τον χώρο.
8. Απαραίτητος εξοπλισμός
Κατά τις διαδικασίες εγκατάστασης, συντήρησης και επισκευής θα πρέπει ο αρμόδιος τεχνικός να δι-
αθέτει όλο τον απαραίτητο εξοπλισμό που αναφέρεται στο παρόν εγχειρίδιο και ο οποίος συστήνεται
από τον κατασκευαστή. Για οποιαδήποτε απορία προκύψει κατά τη διεκπεραίωση των εργασιών, θα
πρέπει να απευθυνθείτε στον κατασκευαστή ή στο αρμόδιο τεχνικό τμήμα για να σας καθοδηγήσει. Οι
παρακάτω έλεγχοι θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιηθούν σε εγκαταστάσεις με εύφλεκτο ψυκτικό υγρό:
Σελίδα 36
l Η επιπλέον προσθήκη ψυκτικού υγρού θα πρέπει να είναι ανάλογη των διαστάσεων του χώρου που
είναι εγκατεστημένη μονάδα.
l Θα πρέπει να εξασφαλίζεται η σωστή και επαρκής ανακυκλοφορία του αέρα.
l Αν χρησιμοποιείται δευτερεύον κύκλωμα ψυκτικού υγρού θα πρέπει ελέγχεται ως προς την επαρκή
ποσότητα του. Οι σημάνσεις θα πρέπει να είναι πάντοτε ορατές και ευανάγνωστες.
l Οι ενδείξεις και οι σημάνσεις που δεν είναι ευανάγνωστες θα πρέπει να διορθωθούν.
l Oι σωλήνες ψύξης ή τα εξαρτήματα θα πρέπει να εγκαθίστανται έτσι ώστε να μην εκτεθειμένα σε
στοιχεία που μπορεί να διαβρώσουν τα συστατικά που περιέχουν όπως πχ. το ψυκτικό υγρό, εκτός εάν
τα εξαρτήματα κατασκευάζονται από υλικά που είναι εγγενώς ανθεκτικά και δεν διαβρώνονται ή διαθέ-
τουν κατάλληλα προστατευτικά.
9. Ηλεκτρολογικός Έλεγχος
Η επισκευή και συντήρηση των ηλεκτρικών μερών ν πρέπει να ακολουθεί τους αρχικούς ελέγχους
ασφαλείας και τις διαδικασίες επιθεώρησης των στοιχείων. Εάν υπάρχει βλάβη που θα μπορούσε να
θέσει σε κίνδυνο την ασφάλεια, τότε θα πρέπει αμέσως να αποσυνδέεται η μονάδα από την παροχή
ρεύματος έως ότου αντιμετωπιστεί το πρόβλημα. Αν το πρόβλημα δεν μπορεί να διορθωθεί αμέσως
αλλά είναι απαραίτητο να συνεχιστεί η λειτουργία της μονάδας, θα πρέπει να βρεθεί μια προσωρινή
λύση. Αυτό πρέπει να αναφέρεται στον ιδιοκτήτη του εξοπλισμού μαζί με όλα τα συμβαλλόμενα μέρη.
Προαπαιτούμενοι έλεγχοι:
l Απόρριψη πυκνωτών: θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται με ασφαλή τρόπο για να αποφευχθούν πιθα-
νοί σπινθήρες.
l Δεν υπάρχουν εκτεθειμένα ηλεκτρικά εξαρτήματα και καλώδια κατά την φόρτιση, την ανάκτηση ή
τον καθαρισμό του συστήματος.
10. Επισκευή σφραγισμένων εξαρτημάτων
10.1. Κ ατά τη διάρκεια επισκευών σε σφραγισμένα εξαρτήματα, όλα τα ηλεκτρικά μέρη θα πρέπει να
αποσυνδεθούν από το τον εξοπλισμό που υφίσταται επεξεργασία πριν από οποιαδήποτε αφαί-
ρεση των σφραγισμένων καλυμμάτων κλπ. Εάν είναι απόλυτα απαραίτητο να υπάρχει ηλεκτρική
τροφοδοσία του εξοπλισμού κατά τη διάρκεια της συντήρησης, τότε θα πρέπει να υπάρχει μόνι-
μη εγκατάσταση ανίχνευσης διαρροών ειδικά στο πιο κρίσιμο σημείο για να προειδοποιήσει για
κάθε επικίνδυνο ενδεχόμενο.
10.2. Ιδιαίτερη προσοχή πρέπει να δοθεί στα ακόλουθα για να διασφαλιστεί ότι με την επεξεργασίας
των ηλεκτρικών εξαρτημάτων, το περίβλημα δεν μεταβάλλεται κατά τέτοιο τρόπο ώστε να επηρε-
άζεται το επίπεδο προστασίας. Σε αυτό περιλαμβάνονται η ζημιά στα καλώδια, η υπερφόρτωση
συνδέσεων στο σύστημα, τερματικά που δεν έχουν κατασκευαστεί σύμφωνα με τις αρχικές προδι-
αγραφές, η φθορά των στεγανών, η εσφαλμένη τοποθέτηση των συνδέσμων κλπ.
l Βεβαιωθείτε ότι η συσκευή είναι στερεωμένη με ασφάλεια.
l Βεβαιωθείτε ότι τα υλικά στεγανοποίησης δεν έχουν φθαρεί, σε σημείο που να μην εξυπηρετούν
πλέον τον λόγο ύπαρξής τους και να μην συμβάλουν στην πρόληψη της εισροής εύφλεκτων
στοιχείων. Τα ανταλλακτικά μέρη πρέπει να συμφωνούν με τις προδιαγραφές του κατασκευαστή.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η χρήση στεγανωτικού πυριτίου μπορεί να εμποδίσει την αποτελεσματικότητα ορισμέ-
νων τύπων εξοπλισμού ανίχνευσης διαρροών. Τα καίρια εξαρτήματα ασφαλείας δεν χρειάζεται να απο-
μονωθούν πριν από την εργασία τους.
11. Επισκευή σε εγγενώς ασφαλή εξαρτήματα
Μην εφαρμόζετε μόνιμα φορτία επαγωγής ή χωρητικότητας στο κύκλωμα χωρίς να εξασφαλίζετε ότι
αυτό δεν θα υπερβαίνει την επιτρεπόμενη τάση και το ρεύμα που συνιστάται για τον εξοπλισμό. Τα εγ-
γενώς ασφαλή εξαρτήματα αποτελούν τους μοναδικούς τύπους που μπορούν να εφαρμοστούν παρου-
σία εύφλεκτων στοιχείων. Η συσκευή πρέπει να έχει τη σωστή διαβάθμιση. Αντικαταστήστε τα εξαρτή-
ματα μόνο με εξαρτήματα που καθορίζει ο κατασκευαστής. Διαφορετικού τύπου εξαρτήματα μπορεί να
προκαλέσουν την ανάφλεξη ψυκτικού μέσου στην ατμόσφαιρα λόγω διαρροής.
Σελίδα 37
12. Καλωδίωση
Ελέγξτε ότι η καλωδίωση δεν έχει υποστεί φθορές, διάβρωση, υπερβολική πίεση, κραδασμούς ή άλλες
δυσμενείς περιβαλλοντικές επιπτώσεις. Ο έλεγχος θα πρέπει να περιλαμβάνει επίσης το γεγονός της
καταπόνησης από πηγές όπως αυτές του συμπιεστή ή του ανεμιστήρα.
13. Ανίχνευση εύφλεκτων ψυκτικών υγρών
Δεν θα πρέπει να χρησιμοποιούνται πηγές ανάφλεξης κατά την αναζήτηση ή ανίχνευση διαρροών του
ψυκτικού υγρού. Ένας αλογονιδωτός πυρσός (ή οποιοσδήποτε άλλο είδος ανίχνευσης που χρησιμοποι-
εί γυμνή φλόγα) απαγορεύεται να χρησιμοποιηθεί.
14. Μέθοδοι ανίχνευσης διαρροής ψυκτικού υγρού
Οι ακόλουθες μέθοδοι ανίχνευσης διαρροών θεωρούνται αποδεκτές για συστήματα που περιέχουν εύ-
φλεκτα ψυκτικά υγρά. Πρέπει να χρησιμοποιούνται ηλεκτρονικοί ανιχνευτές διαρροών για την ανί-
χνευση εύφλεκτων ψυκτικών μέσων, αλλά η ευαισθησία τους ενδέχεται να μην είναι επαρκής ή μπορεί
να χρειαστεί επαναπροσδιορισμός (ο εξοπλισμός ανίχνευσης πρέπει να είναι βαθμονομημένος σε πε-
ριοχή χωρίς ψυκτικό μέσο.) Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο ανιχνευτής δεν αποτελεί πιθανή πηγή ανάφλεξης και εί-
ναι κατάλληλος για το ψυκτικό μέσο με το οποίο λειτουργεί το κλιματιστικό που προμηθευτήκατε. Ο
εξοπλισμός ανίχνευσης διαρροών ορίζεται σε ποσοστό LFL του ψυκτικού μέσου και βαθμονομείται με
το ψυκτικό μέσο που χρησιμοποιείται και το κατάλληλο ποσοστό αερίου είναι μέγιστο 25%. Τα υγρά
ανίχνευσης διαρροών είναι κατάλληλα για χρήση στα περισσότερα ψυκτικά μέσα, αλλά η χρήση απορ-
ρυπαντικών που περιέχουν χλώριο πρέπει να αποφεύγεται καθώς μπορεί να αντιδράσει με το ψυκτικό
υγρό και να διαβρώσει το χάλκινο σωλήνα.
Σε περίπτωση ανίχνευσης διαρροής, όλες οι γυμνές φλόγες πρέπει να σβηστούν. Εάν υπάρχει διαρροή
ψυκτικού - το οποίο απαιτεί συγκόλληση, όλη η ποσότητα του ψυκτικού υγρού θα πρέπει να ανακληθεί
από το σύστημα ή να απομονωθεί (μέσω βαλβίδων διακοπής) σε ένα τμήμα του συστήματος που είναι
απομακρυσμένο από το σημείο που ανιχνεύθηκε η διαρροή. Άζωτο (OFN) χωρίς οξυγόνο θα πρέπει να
χρησιμοποιηθεί έπειτα για τον καθαρισμό του συστήματος τόσο πριν όσο και κατά τη διάρκεια της δι-
αδικασίας συγκόλλησης.
15. Αφαίρεση και εκκένωση
Κατά τη επεξεργασία του κυκλώματος του ψυκτικού μέσου, αν επιθυμείτε να κάνετε επισκευές για
οποιονδήποτε άλλο σκοπό, θα πρέπει να ακολουθήσετε τις προτεινόμενες συμβατικές διαδικασίες.
Ωστόσο, είναι σημαντικό να ακολουθείται η βέλτιστη πρακτική δεδομένου ότι θα πρέπει να αποτρέπε-
ται το ενδεχόμενο ανάφλεξης. Ακολουθήστε την παρακάτω διαδικασία:
l Αφαιρέστε το ψυκτικό
l Καθαρίστε το κύκλωμα με τη χρήση αδρανούς αερίου
l Εκκενώστε
l Καθαρίστε ξανά το κύκλωμα με τη χρήση αδρανούς αερίου
l Ανοίξτε το κύκλωμα με κοπή ή συγκόλληση
Το φορτίο του ψυκτικού μέσου πρέπει να ανακτηθεί εντός των σωστών κυλίνδρων ανάκτησης. Το σύ-
στημα πρέπει να εκκενωθεί με OFN για να καταστεί η μονάδα ασφαλής. Αυτή η διαδικασία μπορεί να
χρειαστεί να επαναληφθεί αρκετές φορές. Ο πεπιεσμένος αέρας ή το οξυγόνο δεν πρέπει να χρησιμο-
ποιούνται για την εργασία αυτή. Η έξαψη πρέπει να επιτυγχάνεται με το σπάσιμο του κενού στο σύ-
στημα με OFN και να συνεχίζεται με το γέμισμα μέχρις ότου να επιτευχθεί η πίεση λειτουργίας. Στη συ-
νέχεια εξαερώστε και τέλος τραβήξτε προς τα κάτω σε κενό. Η διαδικασία αυτή επαναλαμβάνεται μέ-
χρις ότου να μην υπάρχει εντός του συστήματος ψυκτικό υγρό.
Όταν χρησιμοποιείται το τελικό φορτίο OFN, το σύστημα πρέπει να εξαερίζεται μέχρι να φτάσει τα επί-
πεδα της ατμοσφαιρικής πίεσης για να επιτραπεί η πραγματοποίηση των εργασιών. Αυτή η λειτουργία
είναι απολύτως απαραίτητη αν πρόκειται να ακολουθήσουν εργασίες συγκόλλησης στις σωλήνες. Βε-
βαιωθείτε ότι η έξοδος της αντλίας κενού δεν είναι κλειστή σε πηγές ανάφλεξης και υπάρχει επαρκής
εξαερισμός.
16. Διαδικασία πλήρωσης πρόσθετης ποσότητας ψυκτικού υγρού
Εκτός από τις συμβατικές διαδικασίες πλήρωσης, πρέπει να τηρούνται τα ακόλουθα:
Σελίδα 38
l Βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν υπάρχει ανάμειξη διαφορετικών ψυκτικών μέσων κατά τη χρήση της φόρτισης
του εξοπλισμού. Οι σωλήνες πρέπει να είναι όσο το δυνατόν πιο μικροί ώστε να ελαχιστοποιείται η
ποσότητα του ψυκτικού υγρού που περιέχεται σε αυτά.
l Οι κύλινδροι θα πρέπει να βρίσκονται σε κατακόρυφη θέση.
l Βεβαιωθείτε ότι το σύστημα ψύξης είναι επαρκώς γειωμένο πριν τη φόρτιση του συστήματος με ψυ-
κτικό υγρό.
l Επισημάνετε το σύστημα όταν ολοκληρωθεί η φόρτιση (αν δεν το έχετε κάνει ήδη).
l Ιδιαίτερη προσοχή ώστε να μην υπερφορτιστεί το ψυκτικό κύκλωμα.
l Πριν από τη φόρτιση του συστήματος πρέπει να πραγματοποιούνται δοκιμές πίεσης με OFN. Το σύ-
στημα πρέπει να ελέγχεται για ενδεχόμενο διαρροής μετά την ολοκλήρωση της φόρτισης και πριν
την έναρξη λειτουργίας της μονάδας.
17. Παροπλισμός
Πριν από τη διεξαγωγή αυτής της διαδικασίας, είναι απαραίτητο ο τεχνικός να είναι εξοικειωμένος με
τον εξοπλισμό και όλες τις λεπτομέρειες του. Συνιστάται καλή πρακτική για όλα τα ψυκτικά μέσα ώστε
να ανακτώνται με ασφάλεια. Πριν από την εκτέλεση της εργασίας, πρέπει να ληφθεί δείγμα λαδιού και
ψυκτικού μέσου.
Σε περίπτωση που απαιτείται ανάλυση πριν από την επαναχρησιμοποίηση του ψυκτικού μέσου είναι
σημαντικό το σύστημα να τροφοδοτείται με ρεύμα.
Α) Εξοικείωση με τον εξοπλισμό και τη λειτουργικότητά του.
Β) Απομόνωση του ηλεκτρολογικού συστήματος.
Γ) Προτού ξεκινήσετε τη διαδικασία, διασφαλίστε ότι:
l υπάρχει μηχανικός εξοπλισμός, εάν απαιτείται, για το χειρισμό των ψυκτικών κυλίνδρων
l ο προστατευτικός εξοπλισμός είναι διαθέσιμος και χρησιμοποιείται σωστά
l η διαδικασία ανάκτησης εποπτεύεται από αρμόδιο πρόσωπο
l ο εξοπλισμός ανάκτησης και οι κύλινδροι συμμορφώνονται με τα κατάλληλα πρότυπα
Δ) Αφαιρέστε το ψυκτικό κύκλωμα
Ε) Εάν η εκκένωση δεν είναι εφικτή, προσαρμόστε τη βαλβίδα πολλαπλής έτσι ώστε να μπορεί να αφαι-
ρεθεί το ψυκτικό από τα διάφορα μέρη του συστήματος.
ΣΤ) Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο κύλινδρος είναι σωστά τοποθετημένος πριν την ανάκτηση.
Ζ) Ξεκινήστε την ανάκτηση βάσει των οδηγιών του κατασκευαστή.
Η) Μην υπερφορτώνετε τους κυλίνδρους – όχι περισσότερο από το 80%.
Θ) Μην υπερβαίνετε τη μέγιστη πίεση λειτουργίας του κυλίνδρου, ούτε για προσωρινό διάστημα.
Ι) Όταν οι κύλινδροι έχουν πληρωθεί επαρκώς και η διαδικασία λάβει τέλος, βεβαιωθείτε ότι οι κύλιν-
δροι και ο εξοπλισμός έχουν αφαιρεθεί αμέσως από την εγκατάσταση και όλες οι βαλβίδες απομόνω-
σης στον εξοπλισμό είναι κλειστές.
Κ) Το ανακτημένο ψυκτικό μέσο δεν πρέπει να φορτίζεται σε άλλο ψυκτικό σύστημα εκτός εάν έχει κα-
θαριστεί και ελεγχθεί.
18. Χαρακτηρισμός
Ο εξοπλισμός φέρει την ένδειξη ότι έχει εκκενωθεί και αδειάσει από αρμόδιο ψυκτικό. Η ετικέτα θα
πρέπει να αναγράφει ημερομηνία και να φέρει την υπογραφή του. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι υπάρχουν ετικέτες
στον εξοπλισμό που δηλώνουν ότι περιέχει εύφλεκτο ψυκτικό υγρό.
19. Επαναφορά
l Κατά την αφαίρεση ψυκτικού υγρού από ένα σύστημα, είτε για σκοπούς επισκευής είτε για παροπλι-
σμό, συνιστάται καλή πρακτική ώστε όλη η ποσότητα ψυκτικού υγρού να αφαιρείτε με ασφάλεια.
l Κατά τη μεταφορά ψυκτικού υγρού στους κυλίνδρους, βεβαιωθείτε ότι υπάρχει μόνο το ψυκτικό
υγρό που χρησιμοποιούν και οι κύλινδροι ανάκτησης. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι είναι σωστός ο αριθμός κυ-
λίνδρων για τη συγκρότηση της συνολικής χρέωση του συστήματος με ψυκτικό. Όλοι οι κύλινδροι
που πρόκειται να χρησιμοποιηθούν προορίζονται για την ανάκτηση του ψυκτικού μέσου. Οι κύλιν-
δροι πρέπει να είναι διαθέτουν εκτονωτικές βαλβίδες και βαλβίδες διακοπής για να εξασφαλίζεται η
σωστή λειτουργία.
Σελίδα 39
l Οι κύλινδροι ανάκτησης εκκενώνονται και, αν είναι εφικτό, ψύχονται πριν γίνει η ανάκτηση.
l Ο εξοπλισμός ανάκτησης είναι σε καλή κατάσταση λειτουργίας ώστε να επιτευχθεί η ανάκτηση του
εύφλεκτου ψυκτικού υγρού. Επιπλέον, πρέπει να είναι διαθέσιμη μια σειρά βαθμονομημένων ζυγών
σε καλή κατάσταση λειτουργίας.
l Οι σωλήνες πρέπει να είναι σε καλή κατάσταση για την αποφυγή διαρροών. Πριν χρησιμοποιήσε-
τε τον εξοπλισμό ανάκτησης, ελέγξτε ότι βρίσκετε σε ικανοποιητική κατάσταση λειτουργίας και εί-
ναι σωστά συντηρημένος, καθώς και ότι όλα τα ηλεκτρολογικά εξαρτήματα είναι στεγανομένα για να
αποφευχθεί ενδεχόμενο ανάφλεξης σε περίπτωση απελευθέρωσης ψυκτικού υγρού στην ατμόσφαι-
ρα. Συμβουλευτείτε τον κατασκευαστή σε περίπτωση που υπάρχει η οποιαδήποτε απορία.
l Το ανακτημένο ψυκτικό υγρό επιστρέφεται στον προμηθευτή ψυκτικού στο σωστό κύλινδρο ανάκτη-
σης και με το σχετικό σημείωμα μεταφοράς αποβλήτων. Μην αναμειγνύετε διαφορετικούς τύπους
ψυκτικών υγρών σε μονάδες ανάκτησης και ιδιαίτερα σε κυλίνδρους.
l Εάν πρόκειται να αφαιρεθεί ο συμπιεστής ή τα λάδια του συμπιεστή, βεβαιωθείτε ότι έχουν εκκενω-
θεί και βεβαιωθείτε ότι δεν έχει παραμείνει ποσότητα ψυκτικού υγρού εντός του λιπαντικού. Η δια-
δικασία εκκένωσης πρέπει να διεξάγεται πριν από την επιστροφή του συμπιεστή στον προμηθευτή.
Μπορεί να εφαρμοστεί μόνο θέρμανση στο σώμα του συμπιεστή για να επιταχυνθεί αυτή η διαδικα-
σία. Όταν το λάδι αποστραγγίζεται από ένα σύστημα, πρέπει να απομακρύνεται με ασφάλεια.
20. Μεταφορά, σήμανση και αποθήκευση μονάδων
1. Μεταφορά εξοπλισμού που περιέχει εύφλεκτα ψυκτικά μέσα. Συμμόρφωση με τους κανονισμούς
μεταφοράς.
2. Σήμανση του εξοπλισμού με πινακίδες. Συμμόρφωση με τους τοπικούς κανονισμούς.
3. Απόρριψη εξοπλισμού που φέρει εύφλεκτο ψυκτικό υγρό. Συμμόρφωση με τους εθνικούς
κανονισμούς.
4. Αποθήκευση εξοπλισμού / συσκευών. Η αποθήκευση του εξοπλισμού πρέπει να γίνεται σύμφωνα με
τις οδηγίες του κατασκευαστή.
5. Αποθήκευση συσκευασμένου (που δεν έχει πουληθεί) εξοπλισμού. Η προστατευτική συσκευασία
πρέπει να κατασκευάζεται κατά τρόπο ώστε αν προκληθεί μηχανική βλάβη στο σύστημα, ο
εξοπλισμός εντός της συσκευασίας να μην επιφέρει διαρροή του ψυκτικού υγρού. Ο μέγιστος
αριθμός τεμαχίων εξοπλισμού που επιτρέπεται να αποθηκεύονται μαζί καθορίζεται από τους
τοπικούς κανονισμούς.
Όλες οι εικόνες στο παρόν εγχειρίδιο εξυπηρετούν επεξηγηματικούς σκοπούς.
Το προϊόν που προμηθευτήκατε μπορεί να εμφανίζει ορισμένες διαφορές ως προς το
σχήμα, ωστόσο οι λειτουργίες και τα χαρακτηριστικά παραμένουν ίδια.
Η εταιρεία δεν φέρει ευθύνη για τυχόν τυπογραφικά λάθη. Ο σχεδιασμός και οι
προδιαγραφές του προϊόντος μπορεί να τροποποιηθούν χωρίς προηγούμενη ειδοποίηση
με σκοπό τη βελτίωση των προϊόντων.
Για λεπτομέρειες, απευθυνθείτε στον κατασκευαστή στο 211 300 3300 ή στον αντιπρόσωπο.
Τυχόν ενημερώσεις του εγχειρίδιου θα αναρτηθούν στην ιστοσελίδα του κατασκευαστή,
παρακαλούμε να ελέγξετε για την πιο πρόσφατη έκδοση.
Σαρώστε εδώ για να κατεβάσετε την τελευταία έκδοση του εγχειριδίου.
www.inventoraircondition.gr/media-library
Cuprins
Manual de Instalare
Instalare unitate interioară.... 11
Instalare unitate exterioară...
20
8
Măsuri de siguranță......................... 4
0
1
5
Accesorii........................................... 6
2
4
Componente aparat........................ 10
3
Sumar instalare – Unitate interio
.....
1. Alegere loca ie pentru instalare .............................11
2. Ata are plac de montare pe perete......................12
3. Realizare orificiu perete pentru conducte ..............12
4. Preg tire conducte de agent frigorific ....................14
5. Conectare furtun de scurgere ................................15
6. Conectare cablu pentru semnal .............................16
7. Înf urare conducte i cabluri ................................18
8. Montare unitate interioar .......................................18
1. Alegere loca ie pentru instalare .............................20
2. Instalare racord scurgere........................................21
3. Ancorare unitate exterioar ...................................22
4. Conectare cablu semnal i cablu electric ..............23
Cuprins
Manual de Instalare
Instalare unitate interioară.... 11
Instalare unitate exterioară...
20
8
Măsuri de siguranță......................... 4
0
1
5
Accesorii........................................... 6
2
4
Componente aparat........................ 10
3
Sumar instalare – Unitate interio
.....
1. Alegere loca ie pentru instalare .............................11
2. Ata are plac de montare pe perete......................12
3. Realizare orificiu perete pentru conducte ..............12
4. Preg tire conducte de agent frigorific ....................14
5. Conectare furtun de scurgere ................................15
6. Conectare cablu pentru semnal .............................16
7. Înf urare conducte i cabluri ................................18
8. Montare unitate interioar .......................................18
1. Alegere loca ie pentru instalare .............................20
2. Instalare racord scurgere........................................21
3. Ancorare unitate exterioar ...................................22
4. Conectare cablu semnal i cablu electric ..............23
Conectare conducta agent frigorific..
25
Evacuare aer..........................
29
1. Instruc iuni evacuare...................... 29
2. Not cu privire la suplimentare agent frigorific.....30
6
7
8
9
10
Informatii cu privire la operatiunile de service...34
11
MC MC
ATENTIE: Pericol de incendiu
(avertisment valabil pentru
agent frigorific R32/R290)
A. Not cu privire la lungimea conductei....................................25
B. Instruc iuni de conectare Conducte agent frigorific ........... 2 5
1. T iere eav .............................................................25
2. Îndep rtare bavur ................................................... .26
3. Capete conduct expandat ....................................26
4. Legare conducte....................................................... 27
Verific ri electrice i de scurgere gaze............ 31
Testare func ionare............................................32
Dispozi ii europene pentru eliminare.............. 34
Pagina 4
Page 4
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
M suri de siguran
Citi i m surile de siguran înainte de instalare
Instalarea incorect datorat ignor rii instruc iunilor poate duce la daune însemnate sau v t mare
serioas. Gradul de seriozitate al poten ialelor daune sau v tm ri este clasificat fie ca AVERTIZARE fie
ca ATEN IONARE.
Acest simbol indic faptul c ignorarea instruc iunilor poate duce la deces sau
vt mare serioas.
Acest simbol indic faptul c ignorarea instruc iunilor poate duce la v t mare
moderat a unei persoane sau daune asupra aparatului sau a bunurilor.
Acest simbol indic faptul c nu trebuie niciodat s realiza i ac iunea indicat.
Nu modificaţi lungimea cablului de alimentare electrică sau nu utilizaţi un prelungitor pentru alimen-
tarea aparatului. Nu împărţiţi aceeaşi priză cu alte aparate. O alimentare electrică neadecvată sau
insuficientă poate duce la incendiu sau electrocutare.
La conectarea conductei de agent frigorific, nu permiteţi substanţelor sau gazelor în afară de cele
specificate ca şi agent frigorific să pătrundă în aparat. Prezenţa altor gaze sau substanţe va scădea
capacitatea aparatului şi va cauza o presiunea anormală în ciclul agentului frigorific. Acest lucru
poate duce la explozie şi vătămare.
Nu permiteţi copiilor să se joace cu aparatul de aer condiţionat. Copiii trebuie supravegheaţi în
preajma aparatului întotdeauna.
1. Instalaţia trebuie realizată de către un dealer autorizat sau un specialist. O instalaţie defectuoasă
poate duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare sau incendiu.
2. Instalarea trebuie realizată conform cu instrucţiunile de instalare. Instalarea neadecvată poate
duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare sau incendiu.
(în America de Nord, instalarea trebuie realizată în conformitate cu cerinţele NEC şi CEC şi doar de
către personal autorizat)
3. Contactaţi un tehnician de service autorizat pentru repararea sau mentenanţa acestui aparat.
4. Utilizaţi doar accesoriile şi componentele incluse, componentele specificate pentru instalare.
Utilizarea componentelor ce nu corespund standardelor pot duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare,
incendiu şi pot duce la defectarea aparatului.
5. Instalaţi aparatul într-o locaţie solidă ce poate susţine greutatea unităţii. Dacă locaţia aleasă nu
poate susţine greutatea unităţii sau dacă instalarea nu este realizată adecvat, aparatul poate cădea
şi poate duce la vătămare serioasă sau daune.
6. Nu folositi alte mijloace pentru accelerarea procesului de decongelare.
7. Aparatul va fi depozitat intr-o incapere in care nu exista surse de scanteie (flacara deschisa,
aparate pe gaz sau incalzitoare electrice).
8. Nu strapungeti si nu ardeti aparatul.
9. Aparatul va fi depozitat intr-o incapere ventilata si care corespunde ca suprafata, specificatiilor
tehnice ale aparatului.
10. ATENTIE ! Agentii frigorifici nu au miros.
NOTA: Clauzele 7-10 se refera la unitatile care functioneaza cu agent refrigerant R32/R290.
Pagina 5
Page 4
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
M suri de siguran
Citi i m surile de siguran înainte de instalare
Instalarea incorect datorat ignor rii instruc iunilor poate duce la daune însemnate sau v t mare
serioas. Gradul de seriozitate al poten ialelor daune sau v tm ri este clasificat fie ca AVERTIZARE fie
ca ATEN IONARE.
Acest simbol indic faptul c ignorarea instruc iunilor poate duce la deces sau
vt mare serioas.
Acest simbol indic faptul c ignorarea instruc iunilor poate duce la v t mare
moderat a unei persoane sau daune asupra aparatului sau a bunurilor.
Acest simbol indic faptul c nu trebuie niciodat s realiza i ac iunea indicat.
Nu modificaţi lungimea cablului de alimentare electrică sau nu utilizaţi un prelungitor pentru alimen-
tarea aparatului. Nu împărţiţi aceeaşi priză cu alte aparate. O alimentare electrică neadecvată sau
insuficientă poate duce la incendiu sau electrocutare.
La conectarea conductei de agent frigorific, nu permiteţi substanţelor sau gazelor în afară de cele
specificate ca şi agent frigorific să pătrundă în aparat. Prezenţa altor gaze sau substanţe va scădea
capacitatea aparatului şi va cauza o presiunea anormală în ciclul agentului frigorific. Acest lucru
poate duce la explozie şi vătămare.
Nu permiteţi copiilor să se joace cu aparatul de aer condiţionat. Copiii trebuie supravegheaţi în
preajma aparatului întotdeauna.
1. Instalaţia trebuie realizată de către un dealer autorizat sau un specialist. O instalaţie defectuoasă
poate duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare sau incendiu.
2. Instalarea trebuie realizată conform cu instrucţiunile de instalare. Instalarea neadecvată poate
duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare sau incendiu.
(în America de Nord, instalarea trebuie realizată în conformitate cu cerinţele NEC şi CEC şi doar de
către personal autorizat)
3. Contactaţi un tehnician de service autorizat pentru repararea sau mentenanţa acestui aparat.
4. Utilizaţi doar accesoriile şi componentele incluse, componentele specificate pentru instalare.
Utilizarea componentelor ce nu corespund standardelor pot duce la scurgeri de apă, electrocutare,
incendiu şi pot duce la defectarea aparatului.
5. Instalaţi aparatul într-o locaţie solidă ce poate susţine greutatea unităţii. Dacă locaţia aleasă nu
poate susţine greutatea unităţii sau dacă instalarea nu este realizată adecvat, aparatul poate cădea
şi poate duce la vătămare serioasă sau daune.
6. Nu folositi alte mijloace pentru accelerarea procesului de decongelare.
7. Aparatul va fi depozitat intr-o incapere in care nu exista surse de scanteie (flacara deschisa,
aparate pe gaz sau incalzitoare electrice).
8. Nu strapungeti si nu ardeti aparatul.
9. Aparatul va fi depozitat intr-o incapere ventilata si care corespunde ca suprafata, specificatiilor
tehnice ale aparatului.
10. ATENTIE ! Agentii frigorifici nu au miros.
NOTA: Clauzele 7-10 se refera la unitatile care functioneaza cu agent refrigerant R32/R290.
Page 5
WARNING
11. Pentru lucrările electrice, respectaţi standardele, reglementările de cablare locale şi naţionale precum şi
acest manual de instalare. Trebuie să utilizaţi un circuit independent şi o singură priză pentru alimentare
electrică. Nu conectaţi alte aparate la aceeaşi priză. O capacitate electrică insucientă sau defecte ale
lucrărilor electrice pot duce la electrocutare sau incendiu.
12. Pentru toate lucrările electrice, folosiţi cablurile specicate. Conectaţi în mod sigur cablurile şi prindeţi-le
cu clemă pentru a preveni ca forţe din exterior să avarieze terminalul. Legăturile electrice neadecvate pot
duce la supraîncălzire şi pot cauza incendii sau electrocutare.
13. Toate cablajele trebuie aranjate adecvat pentru a asigura închiderea adecvată a capacului panoului de
control. Dacă acest capac al panoului de control nu este bine închis, acest lucru poate duce la coroziune şi
poate cauza ca punctele de legătură de pe terminal să se încingă, să se aprindă sau să cauzeze electrocu-
tare.
14. în anumite medii funcţionale de genul bucătăriilor, camerelor pentru servere, etc. utilizarea unor aparate
de aer condiţionat speciale este recomandată.
15. In cazul deteriorarii cablului de alimentare, acesta va  inlocuit doar de catre un reprezentat al unitatii de
service sau un tehnician autorizat.
16. Acest aparat poate  folosit de catre copii cu varsta peste 8 ani si persoane cu dizabilitati zice, senzoriale
sau mintale, daca aceste persoane au fost instruite si sub constanta supraveghere. Nu permiteti copiilor sa
se joace. Curatarea si mentenanta produsului nu va  facuta de catre copii fara supraveghere.
Pentru aparatele care au un radiator suplimentar, nu instalaţi aparatul la o distanţă mai mică de 1 m (3
picioare) de orice materiale combustibile.
Nu instalaţi aparatul într-o locaţie ce poate  expusă scurgerilor de gaze inamabile. Dacă se acumulează
gaze inamabile în jurul aparatului, acest lucru poate duce la incendiu.
Nu puneţi în funcţiune aparatul de aer condiţionat într-o cameră cu umiditate mare de genul unei băi sau
unei spălătorii. Expunerea excesivă la apă poate duce la un scurtcircuit al componentelor electrice.
1. Produsul trebuie să e adecvat împământat în momentul instalării, în caz contrar poate apărea electrocu-
tare.
2. Instalaţi conducta de scurgere adecvat conform cu instrucţiunile din acest manual. O scurgere improprie
poate duce la daune cauzate de apă asupra casei sau bunurilor dvs.
3. Aparatul va  pastrat in asa fel incat se evite deteriorarea mecanica.
4. Persoanele care vor efectua lucrari asupra aparatului sau asupra traseului frigoric vor  persoane cali-
cate de catre o autoritate evaluatoare competenta.
CAUTION
Mai multe informații despre gazele florinate
1. Acest aparat de aer condiţionat conţine gaze orinate. Pentru informaţii specice cu privire la tipul de gaz
şi cantitatea acestuia, vă rugăm consultaţi eticheta corespunzătoare de pe aparat.
2. Instalarea, repararea, şi întreţinerea acestui aparat trebuie realizate de către un tehnician calicat.
3. Dezinstalarea produsului şi reciclarea trebuie realizate de către un tehnician calicat.
4. Dacă sistemul cuprinde un sistem de detectare a scurgerilor, acesta trebuie să verice scurgerile cel puţin
odată la 12 luni.
5. Atunci când aparatul este vericat pentru scurgeri, păstrarea adecvată a documentelor de vericare este
recomandată.
Pagina 6
Denumire
Formă Cantitate
1
1
1
1
Accesorii
5
5
2
1
2
Page 6
Aparatul de aer condi ionat este livrat înso it de urm toarele accesorii. Utiliza i toate componentele de
instalare i accesoriile pentru instalarea aparatului de aer condi ionat. O instalare neadecvat poate duce
la scurgeri de ap , electrocutare i incendiu sau poate cauza defectarea echipamentului.
Plac de montare
Diblu pentru ancorare
urub de fixare plac montare
ST3,9 x 25
Telecomand
uruburi de fixare pentru suport
telecomand ST2,9 x 10
Suport telecomand
Baterii uscate AAA LR03
Garnitur
Racord de scurgere
Componente
op ionale
(doar pentru modelele cu r cire
i înc lzire)
Pagina 7
Denumire
Formă Cantitate
1
1
1
1
Accesorii
5
5
2
1
2
Page 6
Aparatul de aer condi ionat este livrat înso it de urm toarele accesorii. Utiliza i toate componentele de
instalare i accesoriile pentru instalarea aparatului de aer condi ionat. O instalare neadecvat poate duce
la scurgeri de ap , electrocutare i incendiu sau poate cauza defectarea echipamentului.
Plac de montare
Diblu pentru ancorare
urub de fixare plac montare
ST3,9 x 25
Telecomand
uruburi de fixare pentru suport
telecomand ST2,9 x 10
Suport telecomand
Baterii uscate AAA LR03
Garnitur
Racord de scurgere
Componente
op ionale
(doar pentru modelele cu r cire
i înc lzire)
WARNING
1
1
1
Manual de utilizare
Manual de instalare
Manual pentru telecomandă
Page 7
Denumire
Formă Cantitate
Componente ce trebuie
achiziționate. Consultați dealerul
în legătură cu dimensiunea
conductei.
Sistem de conectare țeav
ă
Partea
lichid
ă
Partea
gazoas
ă
Φ6.35( 1/4 i n)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ9.52(3/8in)
Φ12.7(1/2in)
Φ 16( 5/8in)
Aparatul va fi depozitat intr-o incapere ventilata care corespunde cerintelor de suprafata.
Informatie valabila pentru aparatele ce functioneaza pe baza de agent frigorific R32:
Aparatul va fi instalat, operat si depozitat intr-o incapere cu o suprafata de cel putin 4 metri
patrati.
Aparatul nu va fi instalat intr-o incapere care nu este ventilata, cu o suprafata mai mica de
4mp.
Informatii cu privire la cerintele de spatiu pentru aparatele cu agent frigorific R290:
Unitati cu capacitate<9000 Btu/h : 13mp
Unitati 9000-12000Btu/h :17mp
Unitati 12-18000 Btu/h: 26mp
Unitati 18-24000 Btu/h: 35mp
Φ 19( 3/4in)
USER’S MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
• USER’S MANUAL
• ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
• MANUAL UTILIZATORULUI
REMOTE CONTROLLER
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION MANUAL
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗΣ
MANUAL DE INSTALARE
ENGLISH | ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ | ROMANA
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
MODELS:
PR1VI32-09WFC/PR1VO32-09
PR1VI32-12WFC/PR1VO32-12
PR1VI32-18WFC/PR1VO32-18
PR1VI32-24WFC/PR1VO32-24
Pagina 8
Page 8
Sumar instalare – unitate interioară 2
1 2
34
12cm
(4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm
(4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Alegeți locația pentru instalare
(pagina 11)
Atașați placa de montare
(pagina 12)
Stabiliți poziția oriciului din perete
(pagina 12)
Realizați oriciul din perete
(pagina 12)
Pagina 9
Page 8
Sumar instalare – unitate interioară 2
1 2
34
12cm
(4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm
(4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Page 9
STEP
8
5 6 7
8
9
Conectați țeava
(pagina 25)
Conectați cablurile
(pagina 17)
Înveliți conductele și cablurile
(conditie neaplicabila in anumite zone din Statele Unite ale Am ericii).
(pagina 18)
Pregătiți furtunul
de scurgere
(pagina 14)
Montați unitatea interioară
(pagina 18)
Pagina 10
Page 10
Fig. 3.1
1 2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
11
5
Air-break switch
Componente aparat 3
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA ILUSTRAȚII
Ilustrațiile din prezentul manual au doar scop de exemplificare. Forma reală a unității
interioare poate fi ușor diferită. Forma reală va fi cea care va fi luată în considerare.
NOTA: Instalarea se va face in conformitate cu standardele, normele si reglementarile
locale. Conditiile de instalare pot diferi in functie de zona.
Placă de montare
pe perete
Cablu de alimentare
(la unele modele)
Țeavă agent frigorific
Cablu de semnal
Telecomandă
Conductă de scurgere
Fantă
Suport telecomandă
(la unele modele)
Filtrul Functional (situat in fata filtrului princi-
pal - disponibil doar la anumite modele)
Panou frontal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Cablu de alimentare
unitate exterioară
(la unele modele)
Pagina 11
Page 10
Fig. 3.1
1 2
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
11
5
Air-break switch
Componente aparat 3
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA ILUSTRAȚII
Ilustrațiile din prezentul manual au doar scop de exemplificare. Forma reală a unității
interioare poate fi ușor diferită. Forma reală va fi cea care va fi luată în considerare.
NOTA: Instalarea se va face in conformitate cu standardele, normele si reglementarile
locale. Conditiile de instalare pot diferi in functie de zona.
Placă de montare
pe perete
Cablu de alimentare
(la unele modele)
Țeavă agent frigorific
Cablu de semnal
Telecomandă
Conductă de scurgere
Fantă
Suport telecomandă
(la unele modele)
Filtrul Functional (situat in fata filtrului princi-
pal - disponibil doar la anumite modele)
Panou frontal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Cablu de alimentare
unitate exterioară
(la unele modele)
Page 11
.4
Fig. 3.1-a
Instalare unitate interioară
Instrucțiuni instalare
unitate interioară
ÎNAINTE DE INSTALARE
Înainte de instalarea unității interioare,
consultați eticheta de pe cutia produsului
pentru a asigura numărul modelului
unității interioare se potrivește cu numărul
modelului unității exterioare.
Etapa 1: Alegere locație pentru instalare
Înainte de a instala unitatea interioară, trebuie
alegeți o locație adecvată. Următoarele
reprezintă standarde ce vor ajuta în
alegerea unei locații adecvate pentru aparat.
Locațiile adecvate pentru instalare trebuie
îndeplinească următoarele condiții:
o O circulație bună a aerului
o O scurgere convenabilă
o Zgomotul produs de aparat nu va deranja alți
oameni
o Un loc ferm și solid locația nu va vibra
o Destul de solidă pentru a suporta greutatea
aparatului
o O locație la cel puțin 1 m distanță de toate
dispozitivele electrice (de exemplu televizor,
aparat radio, calculator)
NU instalați aparatul în următoarele locații:
În apropierea unei surse de căldură, aburi
sau gaze inamabile
În apropierea elementelor inamabile de
genul perdelelor sau hainelor
În apropierea obstacolelor ce pot bloca
circularea aerului
Aproape de ușă
Într-o locație supusă luminii directe a soarelui
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA ORIFICIUL DIN
PERETE:
Dacă nu există conducte de agent frigoric x
e:
Atunci când alegeți o locație, rugăm
țineți cont de faptul trebuie lăsați
spațiu sucient pentru un oriciu în perete
(consultați etapa realizare oriciul în perete
pentru conectare conducte) pentru cablul
de semnal și conducta de agent frigoric ce
leagă unitățile interioare și exterioare. Poziția
implicită pentru toate conductele este pe
partea dreaptă a unității interioare (atunci
când uitați la aparat). Însă, aparatul poate
suporta și legarea conductelor pe stânga sau
pe dreapta.
Page 11
Indoor Unit Installation 4
Installation Instructions – Indoor
Unit
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Before installing the indoor unit, refer to the
label on the product box to make sure that the
model number of the indoor unit matches the
model number of the outdoor unit.
Step 1: Select installation location
Before installing the indoor unit, you must
choose an appropriate location. The following
are standards that will help you choose an
appropriate location for the unit.
Proper installation locations meet the
following standards:
o
Good air circulation
o
Convenient drainage
o
Noise from the unit will not disturb other
people
o
Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate
o
Strong enough to support the weight of the
unit
o
A location at least one meter from all other
electrical devices (e.g., TV, radio, computer)
DO NOT install unit in the following
locations:
Near any source of heat, steam, or
combustible gas
Near �ammable items such as curtains or
clothing
Near any obstacle that might block air
circulation
Near the doorway
In a location subject to direct sunlight
NOTE ABOUT WALL HOLE:
If there is no fiFIxed refrigerant piping:
While choosing a location, be aware that you
should leave ample room for a wall hole (see
Drill wall hole for connective piping step)
for the signal cable and refrigerant piping
that connect the indoor and outdoor units.
The default position for all piping is the right
side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit).
However, the unit can accommodate piping to
both the left and right.
Fig. 3.1-a
Fig. 4.1-a
Pagina 12
Etapa 2: Atașare placă de montare pe
perete
Placa de montare este dispozitivul pe care veți
monta unitatea interioară.
1. Îndepărtați șurubul care atașează placa
de montare la partea din spate a unității
interioare.
2. Amplasați placa de montare pe perete
într-o locație care întrunește standardele
din etapa alegerii locației de instalare.
(Consultați secțiunea Dimensiunile Plăcii de
Montare pentru informații detaliate cu privire
la dimensiunile plăcii de montare).
3. Realizați oricii pentru șuruburile de
montare în locurile în care:
au bolțuri și pot susține greutatea unității
corespund oriciilor pentru șuruburi din
placa de montare
4. Asigurați placa de montare de perete cu
șuruburile incluse.
5. Asigurați-vă placa de montare este
dreaptă pe perete
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA PEREȚI DE BETON
SAU DIN CĂRĂMIDĂ:
Dacă peretele este din cărămidă, beton
sau material asemănător, realizați găuri de
5mm diametru (0,2 diametru) în perete și
introduceți diblurile incluse. Apoi asigurați
placa de montare de perete prin strângerea
șuruburilor direct în dibluri.
Etapa 3: Realizare oriciu perete pentru
conducte
Trebuie realizați gaura din perete pentru
conducta de agent frigoric, conducta de
scurgere și cablul de semnal ce vor lega
unitatea interioară de cea exterioară.
1. Stabiliți locația oriciului din perete pe
baza poziției plăcii de montare. Consultați
capitolul Dimensiunile Plăcii de Montare
de pe pagina următoare pentru stabilirea
poziției optime. Oriciul din perete trebuie
aibă un diametru de cel puțin de 65mm
(2,5in) și aibă un unghi ușor înclinat
pentru a face scurgerea mai ușoară.
2. Utilizând un burghiu de 65 mm (2,5in),
realizați o gaură în perete. Asigurați-vă
oriciul este în unghi ușor înclinat astfel
încât partea exterioară a oriciului e
mai jos decât cea interioară cu 5-7 mm (0,2-
0,275in). Acest lucru asigură scurgerea
adecvată a apei (Consultați Fig. 3.2)
3. Amplasați manșeta de protecția în oriciu.
Acest lucru protejează marginile și ajută la
etanșarea acesteia la nalizarea procesului
de instalare.
Page 12
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm (4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
ATENȚIE
Realizând oriciul din perete, asigurați-
veți evita cablurile, instalația și alte
componente sensibile.
Consultați următoarea schemă pentru a asigura distanța adecvată de la tavan și de la pereți:
sau mai mult
sau mai mult
sau mai multsau mai mult
Page 12
Refer to the following diagram to ensure proper distance from walls and ceiling:
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm (4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
Step 2: Attach mounting plate to wall
The mounting plate is the device on which you
will mount the indoor unit.
1.
Remove the screw that attaches the mounting
plate to the back of the indoor unit.
2.
Place the mounting plate against the wall
in a location that meets the standards in
the Select Installation Location step. (See
Mounting Plate Dimensions for detailed
information on mounting plate sizes.)
3.
Drill holes for mounting screws in places that:
have studs and can support the weight of
the unit
correspond to screw holes in the mounting
plate
4.
Secure the mounting plate to the wall with
the screws provided.
5.
Make sure that mounting plate is flat against
the wall.
NOTE FOR CONCRETE OR BRICK WALLS:
If the wall is made of brick, concrete, or similar
material, drill 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter)
holes in the wall and insert the sleeve anchors
provided. Then secure the mounting plate to
the wall by tightening the screws directly into
the clip anchors.
Step 3: Drill wall hole for connective piping
You must drill a hole in the wall for refrigerant
piping, the drainage pipe, and the signal cable
that will connect the indoor and outdoor units.
1.
Determine the location of the wall hole based
on the position of the mounting plate. Refer
to Mounting Plate Dimensions on the
next page to help you determine the optimal
position. The wall hole should have a 65mm
(2.5in) diameter at least, and at a slightly
lower angle to facilitate drainage.
2.
3.
Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This
protects the edges of the hole and will help
seal it when you finish the installation process.
CAUTION
When drilling the wall hole, make sure to
avoid wires, plumbing, and other sensitive
components.
Using a 65mm (2.5in) or 90mm(3.54in)
(depending on models )core drill, drill a
hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole
is drilled at
a slight downward angle, so
that the outdoor end of the hole is lower
than the indoor end by about 5mm to 7mm
(0.2-0.27in). This will ensure proper water
drainage. (See Fig. 3.2)
Fig. 4.1-b
Pagina 13
Page 13
mm7-5
(0.2-0.27in)
Fig.3.2
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
Model B
Model A
146.5mm(5.76in)
228.5mm(8.99in) 241mm(9.48in)
45mm(1.7in) 101.6mm(4in)
183.6mm(7.2in)
123.6mm(4.86in)
715mm(28in)
805mm(31.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
115.6mm(4.55in)
233.1mm(9.17in)
398mm(15.67in)
398mm(15.98in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
302mm (11.88in)
36.6mm
(1.44in)
36.7mm
(1.44in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47.5mm
(1.87in)
Model C
304.1mm(11.9in) 224.2mm(8.82in)
45mm(1.7in)
259.1mm(10.2in)
100.6mm(3.96in)123.7mm(4.87in)
958.3mm(37.7in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
324.9mm (12.79in)
55mm
(2.16in)
47mm
(1.85in)
47mm
(1.85in)
55mm
(2.16in)
Model D
316.7mm(12.4in)
1037.6mm(40.85in)
271.7mm(10.69in)
291mm(11.45in)
246mm(9.68in)
45mm(1.77in)
45mm(1.77in)
Left rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Right rear wall
hole 65mm (2.5in)
Indoor unit
outline
39mm
(1.5in)
39mm
(1.5in)
285mm (11.2in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
47.1mm
(1.85in)
45mm(1.7in)
117.5mm(4.62in)
439mm(17.28in)
506mm(19.92in)
Page 12
Fig. 3.1-b
12cm (4.75in)
2.3m (90.55in)
12cm (4.75in)
15cm (5.9in)
DIMENSIUNI PLACĂ DE MONTARE
Modelele diferite au plăci de montare
diferite. Pentru a asigura aveți
sucient spațiu pentru montarea unității
interioare, schițele din dreapta arată diferite
tipuri de placă de montare împreună cu
următoarele dimensiuni:
Lățimea plăcii de montare
Înălțimea plăcii de montare
Lățimea unității interioare comparativ cu
placa
Înălțimea unității interioare comparativ cu
placa
Poziția recomandată a oriciului din
perete (atât la stânga cât și la dreapta
plăcii de montare)
Distanțele relative dintre oriciile pentru
șuruburi
NOTA: In cazul in care conducta de legatura
(pentru gaz) are dimensiunea de Ø16mm(5.8
in) strapungerea din perete va avea
dimensiunea de Ø90mm(3.54 in)
Interior
Perete
Orientare corectă a plăcii de montare
Pagina 14
Etapa 4: Pregătire conducte de agent
frigoric
Conductele de agent frigoric se găsesc în
interiorul unui manșon de etanșare atașat
în spatele aparatului. Trebuie pregătiți
conducta înainte de trecerea acesteia prin
oriciul din perete. Consultați secțiunea
legarea conductei de agent frigoric din
prezentul manual pentru instrucțiuni detaliate
cu privire la lărgirea conductelor și cerințele,
tehnica privind strângerea expandării.
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA UNGHIUL
CONDUCTEI
Conductele de agent frigoric pot ieși din
unitatea interioară prin 4 unghiuri diferite:
Partea stângă
Stânga-spate
Partea dreaptă
Dreapta-spate
Consultați Fig. 4.4 pentru detalii.
ATENȚIE
Aveți deosebită grijă nu loviți sau avariați conducta în timpul îndoirii dinspre unitate. Orice
lovituri din conducte vor afecta performanța aparatului.
Page 14
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
3. Utilizați foarfecile pentru a tăia pe lungimea
manșonului de izolare și a avea aproximativ
15 cm (6in) din conducta de agent frigoric.
Acest lucru deservește pentru două scopuri:
Pentru a facilita procesul de conectare al
conductei de agent frigoric
Pentru a facilita vericările pentru scurgerile
de gaze și pentru a permite vericați
pentru lovituri.
4. Daca exista deja tubulatura instalata prin
perete, treceti direct la conectarea furtunului
de scurgere. In cazul in care nu aveti
tubulatura instalata, conectați conducta de
agent frigoric a unității interioare la țeava de
legătură care va conecta unitatea interioară și
exterioară. Consultați secțiunea Conectarea
Conductei de agent frigoric a prezentului
manual pentru instrucțiuni detaliate.
5. Pe baza poziției oriciului din perete
comparativ cu placa de montare, stabiliți
unghiul necesar pentru conducte.
6. Apucați țeava de agent frigoric la baza
îndoiturii.
7. Încet, folosind o presiune constantă, îndoiți
țeava spre oriciu. Nu loviți sau nu avariați
conducta pe parcursul acestei operațiuni.
1. Pe baza poziției oriciului din perete
comparativ cu placa de montare, alegeți
partea prin care conducta iasă din perete.
2. Dacă oriciul din perete se aă în spatele
unității, păstrați panoul de îndepărtat la locul
său. Dacă oriciul din perete este pe partea
laterală a unității interioare, îndepărtați
panoul din partea laterală a unității
(consultați Fig. 4.3). Acest lucru va crea
o fantă prin care conducta poate ieși din
unitate. Utilizați clești cu vârf ascuțit dacă
panoul din plastic este dicil de îndepărtat
cu mâna.
Fig. 4.4
Fig. 4.3
Panou de îndepărtat
Pagina 15
Etapa 5: Conectarea furtunului de scurgere
Implicit, furtunul de scurgere este atașat pe
partea stângă a unității (atunci când sunteți cu
spatele la aparat). Însă, acesta poate atașat
pe partea dreaptă.
1. Pentru a asigura o scurgere adecvată,
atașați furtunul de scurgere pe aceiași parte
cu conductele existente de pe aparatul dvs.
2. Atașați extensia furtunului de scurgere
(achiziționată separat) la capătul furtunului
de scurgere.
3. Strângeți ferm punctul de legătură cu bandă
de teon pentru a asigura o etanșare bună
și pentru a preveni scurgerile.
4. Pentru partea din furtunul de scurgere
care va rămâne la interior, folosiți spumă
de etanșare pentru țevi pentru a preveni
condensul.
5. Îndepărtați ltrul de aer și puneți o cantitate
mică de apă în tava de scurgere pentru a
asigura apa se scurge adecvat din
aparat.
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE LA AMPLASAREA
FURTUNULUI DE SCURGERE
Asigurați aranjarea furtunului de scurgere
conform cu Fig. 4.5.
NU îndoiți furtunul în bucle.
NU creați locuri unde poate se
adune apa
NU puneți capătul furtunului de
scurgere în apă sau într-un container care
colectează apă.
Page 16
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
ASTUPAȚI ORIFICIUL DE SCURGERE
NEUTILIZAT
Pentru a preveni scurgerile nedorite
trebuie astupați oriciile de scurgere
neutilizate cu dopul de cauciuc inclus.
CORECT
Asigurați-vă nu există
bucle sau lovituri ale
furtunului de scurgere
pentru a asigura o
scurgere adecvată.
GREȘIT
Buclele din furtun vor
crea locuri în care se
poate aduna apa.
GREȘIT
Buclele din furtun vor
crea locuri în care se
poate aduna apa.
GREȘIT
Nu puneți capătul
furtunului de scurgere
în apă sau containere
de apă. Acest lucru va
împiedica scurgerea
adecvată.
Fig. 4.8
Fig. 4.7
Fig. 4.6
Fig. 4.5
Pagina 16
ÎNAINTE DE REALIZAREA LUCRĂRILOR ELECTRICE, CITIȚI
ACESTE REGLEMENTĂRI
AVERTIZARE
1 Toate cablajele trebuie e în conformitate cu codurile electrice locale și naționale, și
trebuie izolate de către un electrician autorizat.
2 Toate legăturile electrice trebuie realizate în conformitate cu diagrama conexiunilor electrice
localizată pe panourile unităților interioare și exterioare.
3 Dacă există o problemă de siguranță serioasă cu privire la alimentarea electrică, opriți
imediat aparatul. Explicați acest motiv clientului și refuzați instalarea până ce aparatul nu va
avea această problemă de siguranță rezolvată.
4 Voltajul electric trebuie e între 90 100% din voltajul nominal. O alimentare electrică
insucientă poate duce la defecțiune, electrocutare sau incendiu.
5 Dacă alimentarea electrică este legată de cablarea xă, instalați o protecție la
supratensiune și păstrați comutatorul principal cu o capacitate de 1,5 ori mai mare decât
capacitatea maximă a curentului aparatului.
6 Dacă electricitatea este conectată la cablarea xă, un comutator sau un întrerupător de
circuit ce deconectează toți poli și are o separare de contact de cel puțin 1/8 in (3 mm)
trebuie încorporat în cablarea xă. Tehnicianul calicat trebuie utilizeze un întrerupător
de circuit adecvat.
7 Conectați aparatul la priza de circuit a ramicației. Nu conectați alte aparate la aceeași
priză.
8 Asigurați-vă de împământarea adecvată a aparatului de aer condiționat.
9 Fiecare cablu trebuie conectat bine. Cablurile conectate slab pot duce la supraîncălzirea
terminalului, ce duce la defectarea produsului și un posibil incendiu.
10 Nu permiteți cablurilor atingă sau stea pe conducta de agent frigoric, compresor sau
orice componente în mișcare ale aparatului.
11 Dacă aparatul este însoțit de un radiator electric suplimentar, acesta trebuie instalat la cel
puțin 1 m (40in) departe de materiale combustibile.
ÎNAINTE DE REALIZAREA ORICĂROR LUCRĂRI ELECTRICE, OPRIȚI
ALIMENTAREA ELECTRICĂ A APARATULUI DIN COMUTATORUL PRINCIPAL.
Pagina 17
> 3 6
> 6 101
> 10 161
> 16 252
> 25 324
> 32 406
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Etapa 6: Conectare cablu pentru semnal
Cablul de semnal permite comunicarea
dintre unitatea interioară și cea exterioară.
Trebuie alegeți mai întâi dimensiunea
corectă a cablului înainte de a-l pregăti pentru
conectare.
Tipuri de cabluri
Cablu de alimentare intern (dacă este cazul)
H05W-F sau H05V2V2-F
Cablu de alimentare extern: H07RN-F
Cablu de semnal: H07RN-F
Secțiunea transversală minimă a cablurilor
de alimentare și de semnal
America de Nord
Alte regiuni
ALEGEȚI DIMENSIUNEA CORECTĂ A
CABLULUI
Dimensiunea cablului de alimentare, cablului
de semnal, siguranței și comutatorului
necesare sunt stabilite de curentul maxim al
aparatului. Curentul maxim este indicat pe
plăcuța de identicare localizată pe panoul
lateral al aparatului. Consultați plăcuța de
identicare pentru a alege cablul, siguranța
sau comutatorul adecvat.
Amperi aparat (A)
Curentul nominal
al aparatului (A)
AWG
Zonă nominală
transversală (mm2)
și
și
și
și
și
și
0,75
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
ȚINEȚI CONT DE CABLURILE
ALIMENTATE
În operațiunea de ambutisare, aveți grijă la
diferențierea clară a cablurilor alimentate (cu
inscripția L-live) de celelalte cabluri.
2. Deschideti panoul frontal al unitatii
interioare.
3. Folosind surubelnita, deschideti capacul
cutiei pentru cabluri, situate in partea
dreapta a unitatii. Inlaturand capacul, veti
putea accesa blocul terminal.
ȚINEȚI CONT DE SPECIFICAȚIILE
SIGURANȚEI
Placa de circuit a aparatului de aer condiționat
(PCB) este prevăzută cu o siguranță pentru
a oferi protecție la supra circuit. Specicațiile
AVERTIZARE
TOATE CABLAJELE TREBUIE REALIZATE STRICT
ÎN CONFORMITATE CU DIAGRAMA DE CABLARE
DIN INTERIORUL PANOULUI UNITĂȚII INTERIOARE
4. Deșurubați clema cablului din partea de jos
a terminalului și puneți-o deoparte.
siguranței sunt tipărite pe panou, de genul
Unitate interioara: T5A/250VAC
Unitate exterioara (valabil doar pentru
unitatile ce utilizeaza freon R32 sau R290):
T20A/250VAC (capacitate de pana la 18000 BTU).
T30A/250VAC (capacitate peste 18000 BTU).
NOTA: siguranta este ceramica.
1. Pregătiți cablul pentru conectare:
a. Utilizând un instrument de de-izolat
cabluri, îndepărtați stratul de cauciuc de
la ambele capete ale cablului de semnal
pentru a avea liberi aproximativ 15cm (6in)
de cablu la interior.
b. Îndepărtați izolația de la capetele
cablurilor.
c. Utilizând o mașină de ambutisat cabluri
ambutisați caneluri de tip U la capetele
cablurilor.
Page 17
Step 6: Connect signal cable
The signal cable enables communication between
the indoor and outdoor units. You must fiFIrst
choose the right cable size before preparing it for
connection.
Cable Types
Indoor Power Cable (if applicable):
H05VV-F or H05V2V2-F
Outdoor Power Cable: H07RN-F
Signal Cable: H07RN-F
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Power and Signal Cables
Other Regions
Rated Current of
Appliance (A)
Nominal Cross-Sectional
Area (mm²)
> 3 and 6 0.75
> 6 and 10 1
> 10 and 16 1.5
> 16 and 25 2.5
> 25 and 32 4
> 32 and 40 6
CHOOSE THE RIGHT CABLE SIZE
The size of the power supply cable, signal
cable, fuse, and switch needed is determined
by the maximum current of the unit. The
maximum current is indicated on the nameplate
located on the side panel of the unit. Refer to
this nameplate to choose the right cable, fuse,
or switch.
TAKE NOTE OF FUSE SPECIFICATIONS
The air conditioner’s circuit board (PCB) is
designed with a fuse to provide overcurrent
protection. The specifications of the fuse
Fig. 3.9
North America
Appliance Amps (A) AWG
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Diagrama de cablaje se aă la
interiorul panoului de cabluri al
unității interioare.
Blocul terminal
Capac
cabluri
Clemă cablu
Surub
Fig. 4.9
Pagina 18
NOTĂ CU PRIVIRE
LA CABLARE
ATENȚIE
NU AMESTECAȚI FIRELE SUB
TENSIUNE CU CELE NULE
Acest lucru este periculos și poate duce la
defectarea aparatului de aer condiționat.
8. După vericarea pentru a asigura
ecare conexiune este sigură, utilizați clema
pentru cabluri pentru a strânge cablul de
semnal al unității. Strângeți ferm clema
pentru cabluri.
9. Puneți la loc capacul relor din fața unității,
precum și panoul de plastic din spate.
PROCESUL DE CONECTARE A CABLURILOR
POATE FI UȘOR DIFERIT ÎN FUNCȚIE DE
MODEL.
Page 19
Fig. 3.14
Etapa 7: Înfășurare conducte și cabluri
Înainte de a trece conductele, furtunul de
scurgere și cablurile prin oriciul din perete,
trebuie le strângeți pe toate pentru a
economisi spațiul, le protejați și le izolați.
1. Strângeți furtunul de scurgere, conducta de
agent frigoric și cablul de semnal conform
gurii 4.10.
FURTUNUL DE SCURGERE TREBUIE
FIE DEDESUBT
Asigurați-vă furtunul de scurgere este
dedesubt în timpul strângerii. Dacă așezați
deasupra furtunul de scurgere, acest lucru
poate duce la revărsarea tăvii de umplere
ceea ce poate duce la incendiu și daune din
cauza apei.
NU INTERCALAȚI CABLUL DE SEMNAL
CU ALTE CABLURI
În timpul strângerii acestor elemente, nu
intercalați și nu treceți cablul de semnal
peste niciun alt cablu.
2. Utilizând bandă adezivă de vinil, atașați
furtunul de scurgere pe sub conductele de
agent frigoric.
3. Utilizând bandă izolatoare, înfășurați strâns
cablul de semnal, conductele de agent
frigoric și furtunul de scurgere. Vericați
de două ori ca toate acestea e strânse
conform cu Fig. 4.10.
NU STRÂNGEȚI CAPETELE
CONDUCTELOR
În timpul strângerii acestor elemente, păstrați
capetele conductelor neînfășurate. Trebuie
aveți acces la ele pentru a testa împotriva
scurgerilor la nalul procesului de instalare
(consultați capitolele Vericarea Electrică
și Vericarea pentru scurgeri din acest
manual).
Etapa 8: Montare unitate interioară
Dacă ați instalat conducte de legătură noi pe
unitatea exterioară, urmați următorii pași:
1. Dacă ați trecut deja conducta de agent
frigoric prin oriciul din perete, treceți la
pasul 4.
2. În caz contrar, vericați de două ori
sigilați capetele conductei de agent frigoric
pentru a preveni ca murdăria sau corpurile
străine intre în conductă.
3. Treceți ușor conductele de agent frigoric,
furtunul de scurgere și cablul de semnal
strânse împreună prin oriciul din perete.
4. Agățați partea de sus a unității interioare pe
cârligul de sus de pe placa de montare.
5. Vericați ca unitatea e ferm agățată
pe placa de montare prin apăsarea ușoară
5. Privind în spatele unității, îndepărtați
capacul de plastic din partea de jos al părții
din stânga.
6. Treceți cablul de semnal prin fanta din
spatele unității spre față.
7. Cu fața la aparat, potriviți culorile cu
etichetele de pe blocul terminal, conectați
ambutisarea sub formă de U și înșurubați
ferm ecare cablu la terminalul său
corespunzător.
Unitate interioară
Spațiu din spate
Conductă
ag.frigoric
Bandă de izolare
Cablu de semnal Furtun de scurgere
Fig. 4.10
Pagina 19
Page 19
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
30-50mm
(1.2-1.95in)
Unitatea este ajustabila
Luati in considerare faptul ca suportii de instalare aati pe suportul de montaj au o
dimensiune redusa in comparative cu oriciile de pe unitatea interioara.
Daca veti constata ca nu aveti spatiu sucient pentru conectarea tubulaturii, puteti ajusta
unitatea interioara cu 30-50mm (1.25-1.95), in functie de model. (vezi imaginea 3.12)
Fig. 4.11
Fig. 4.12
în stânga și dreapta unității. Unitatea nu
trebuie se miște sau se mute.
6. Utilizând o presiune egală, apăsați pe
partea de jos a unității. Continuați apăsați
până ce aparatul se prinde de cârligele de
pe capătul plăcii de montare.
7. Din nou, vericați ca unitatea e ferm
montată prin apăsarea ușoară în stânga și
dreapta unității. Dacă conducta de agent
frigoric este deja introdusă în perete,
urmați următoarele indicații:
Dacă conductele de agent frigoric
existente sunt deja încastrate în perete,
faceți următoarele:
1. Agatati partea superioara a unitatii
interioare, de carlgiul superior situate pe
placa de montaj.
2. Folositi o pana pentru a xa unitatea.
Asigurati sucient spatiu pentru conectarea
tubulaturii, cablurilor de semnal si a
conductei de scurgere. Consultati imaginea
3.11 pentru mai multe informatii.
3. Conectați furtunul de scurgere și conducta
de agent frigoric (consultați secțiunea
Conectarea Conductei de Agent Frigoric
din acest manual pentru instrucțiuni).
4. Țineți punctul de conexiune al conductei
expus pentru a realiza testul de scurgeri
(consultați capitolul Vericări Electrice și
Vericări pentru Scurgeri din prezentul
manual).
5. După testul de scurgeri, înfășurați punctul
de conexiune cu bandă izolatoare.
6. Îndepărtați consola sau manșonul care
susține unitatea cu bandă izolatoare.
7. Utilizând o presiune egală, apăsați în jos
pe butonul din jumătatea unității. Continuați
apăsarea în jos până ce unitatea se închide
în cârligele de in partea de jos a plăcii de
montare.
Mișcați la stânga sau la dreapta
Pagina 20
Page 20
.5
)ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
30cm (12in)
200cm (79in)
30cm (12in)
Fig. 4.1
Instalare unitate exterioară
Instrucțiuni instalare
unitate exterioară
Etapa 1: Alegere locație pentru instalare
Înainte de a instala unitatea exterioară, trebuie
alegeți o locație adecvată. Următoarele
reprezintă standarde ce vor ajuta în
alegerea unei locații adecvate pentru aparat.
Locațiile adecvate pentru instalare trebuie
îndeplinească următoarele condiții:
o Întrunirea tuturor cerințelor speciale ce se
pot vedea în Cerințele de spațiu ale instalării
(Fig. 5.1)
o O circulație bună a aerului
o Un loc ferm și solid locația va putea
susține unitatea și nu va vibra
o Zgomotul produs de aparat nu va deranja
alți oameni
o O locație ferită de perioadele lungi de
expunere la razele solare.
NU instalați aparatul în următoarele locații:
În apropierea unui obstacol ce va bloca
admisia și evacuarea aerului.
În preajma unei străzi publice, unei zone
aglomerate, sau unde zgomotul aparatului
va deranja alți oameni
În apropierea animalelor sau plantelor care
vor suferi din urma evacuării de aer.
În apropierea oricărei surse de gaze
inamabile.
Într-o locație care este expusă cantităților
mari de praf
Într-o locație supusă unei cantități excesive
de aer sărat
pe stânga
deasupra
în față
De la
perete
spate
pe dreapta
Fig. 5.1
Pagina 21
Page 20
.5
)ni42( mc06
60cm (24in)
30cm (12in)
200cm (79in)
30cm (12in)
Fig. 4.1
Page 21
(A) (B)
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.4
Vânt puternic
Vânt puternic
Oriciu tavă de colectare la
baza unității exterioare
Garnitură
Garnitură
Jonctiune scurgere
Vânt puternic
Apărătoare
vânt
CONSIDERENTE SPECIALE PENTRU
VREME EXTREMĂ
Dacă unitatea este expusă vântului puternic:
Instalați unitatea astfel încât fanta de
evacuare este la unghi de 90o în direcția
vântului. Dacă este nevoie, construiți o
barieră în fața unității pentru a o proteja de
vânturile extrem de puternice. Consultați Fig.
5.2 și Fig. 5.3 de mai jos.
Dacă racordul de scurgere este prevăzut
cu o garnitură din cauciuc (consultați
Fig.5.4 A), acționați în următorul fel:
1. Potriviți garnitura de cauciuc pe capătul
racordului de scurgere care va conecta
unitatea exterioară.
2. Introduceți racordul de scurgere în oriciul
din tava de colectare de la baza unității.
3. Rotiți racordul de scurgere 90 ° până ce se
xează printr-un sunet de clic cu fața spre
partea frontală a unității.
4. Conectați o extensie a furtunului de
scurgere (nu este inclusă) la racordul de
scurgere pentru a redirecționa apa din
unitate în timpul modulului de încălzire.
Dacă racordul de scurgere nu este
prevăzut cu garnitură din cauciuc
(consultați Fig. 5.4 B), urmați următoarele
etape:
1. Introduceți racordul de scurgere în oriciul
din tava de colectare de la baza unității.
Racordul de scurgere va scoate un sunet de
clic atunci când este xat.
2. Conectați o extensie a furtunului de
scurgere (nu este inclusă) la racordul de
scurgere pentru a redirecționa apa din
unitate în timpul modulului de încălzire.
Dacă unitatea este expusă frecvent
ploilor torențiale sau căderilor masive
de zăpadă: Construiți un adăpost deasupra
unității pentru a o proteja de ploaie sau
zăpadă. Aveți grijă sa nu blocați uxul de aer
din jurul unității.
Dacă unitatea este expusă frecvent la aer
sărat (pe malul mării): Utilizați o unitate
exterioară special proiectată pentru a rezista
la coroziune.
Etapa 2: Instalare racord de scurgere
Unitatea pompei de căldură necesită un
racord de scurgere. Înainte de xarea unității
exterioare, trebuie instalați un racord de
scurgere în partea de jos a unității. Țineți minte
există două tipuri diferite de racorduri de
scurgere în funcție de tipul unității exterioare.
ÎN MEDIILE RECI
În mediile reci, asigurați-vă furtunul de
scurgere este pe cât de vertical posibil
pentru a asigura o scurgere rapidă a apei.
Dacă apa se scurge prea încet, aceasta
poate înghețe pe furtun și inunde
unitatea.
Fig. 5.4
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.2
Pagina 22
Page 22
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Fig. 4.5
W x H x D
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Etapa 3: Ancorare unitate
exterioară
Unitate exterioară poate ancorată
de pământ sau pe consolă montată
pe perete
Dimensiunile de montare ale
unității
Următorul tabel reprezintă o
listă cu diversele dimensiuni ale
unității exterioare și distanța dintre
picioarele de montare. Pregătiți
baza de instalare a unității conform
cu dimensiunile de mai jos.
Dacă instalați unitatea pe pământ sau pe o
platformă de montare din beton, urmați pașii
următori:
1. Marcați pozițiile pentru 4 bolțuri de
expansiune pe baza dimensiunilor din
Schema Dimensiunilor de Montare ale
Unității.
2. Realizați dinainte oricii pentru bolțurile de
expansiune.
3. Curățați praful provenit din beton din găuri.
4. Puneți o piuliță la capătul ecărui bolț de
expansiune.
5. Bateți cu ciocanul bolțurile de expansiune în
găurile date dinainte.
6. Îndepărtați piulițele de pe bolțurile de
expansiune și puneți unitatea exterioară pe
bolțuri.
7. Puneți șaibe pe ecare bolț de expansiune
apoi înlocuiți piulițele.
8. Utilizând o cheie, strângeți ecare piuliță bine.
Admisie aer
Lățime
Admisie aer
Evacuare aer
Dimensiunile unității exterioare (mm/in)
Distanța A (mm/in) Distanța Β (mm/in)
Dimensiuni de montare
AVERTIZARE
ATUNCI CÂND REALIZAȚI GĂURI ÎN BETON,
ESTE RECOMANDAPROTEJAREA OCHILOR
ÎN PERMANENȚĂ.
Fig. 5.5
Pagina 23
Page 22
A
W
B
D
Air inlet
Air outlet
Air inlet
A
W
B
D
Fig. 4.5
W x H x D
681x434x285 (26.8”x17”x11.2”) 460 (18.10”) 292 (11.49”)
700x550x270 (27.5”x21.6”x10.62”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
780x540x250 (30.7”x21.25”x9.85”) 549 (21.6”) 276 (10.85”)
845x700x320 (33.25”x27.5”x12.6”) 560 (22”) 335 (13.2”)
810x558x310 (31.9”x22”x12.2”) 549 (21.6”) 325 (12.8”)
900x860x315 (35.4”x33.85”x12.4”) 590 (23.2”) 333 (13.1”)
945x810x395 (37.2”x31.9”x15.55”) 640 (25.2”) 405 (15.95”)
946x810x420 (37.21”x31.9”x16.53”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
946x810x410 (37.21”x31.9”x16.14”) 673 (26.5”) 403 (15.87”)
845x702x363 (33.25”x27.63”x14.29”) 540 (21.26”) 350 (13.8”)
700x550x275 (27.5”x21.6”x10.82”) 450 (17.7”) 260 (10.24”)
770x555x300 (30.3”x21.85”x11.81”) 487 (19.2”) 298 (11.73”)
800x554x333 (31.5”x21.8”x13.1”) 514 (20.24”) 340 (13.39”)
Page 23
Dacă veți instala unitatea pe o consolă
montată pe perete, faceți următoarele:
1. Marcați poziția oriciilor pentru consolă
pe baza dimensiunilor din Schema
Dimensiunilor de Montare ale Unității.
2. Realizați dinainte oricii pentru bolțurile de
expansiune.
3. Curățați praful provenit din beton din găuri.
4. Puneți o piuliță la capătul ecărui bolț de
expansiune.
5. Treceți bolțurile de expansiune prin găurile
din consola de montare, puneți consola
de montare în poziție și bateți cu ciocanul
bolțurile de expansiune în perete.
6. Vericați dacă consola de montareeste
dreaptă.
7. Ridicați cu atenție unitatea și puneți
picioarele de montare pe consolă.
8. Prindeți cu șuruburi în mod ferm unitatea de
consolă.
PENTRU A REDUCE VIBRAȚIILE
UNITĂȚII MONTATE PE PERETE
Dacă vi se permite, puteți instala unitatea pe
perete împreună cu o garnitură din cauciuc
pentru a reduce vibrațiile și zgomotul.
Etapa 4: Conectare cablu semnal și cablu
electric
Blocul terminal al unității exterioare este
protejat de o carcasă de cablaje electrice
pe o parte a unității. O diagramă de cablare
cuprinzătoare este tipărită pe interiorul
capacului de cablare.
ÎNAINTE DE EFECTUAREA
LUCRĂRILOR ELECTRICE,
CITIȚI ACESTE REGLEMENTĂRI
1. Toate cablurile trebuie e conform
cu codurile electrice locale și naționale
și trebuie e instalate de către un
electrician autorizat.
2. Toate conexiunile electrice trebuie realizate
conform cu diagrama legăturilor electrice
localizată pe panourile laterale ale unităților
interioare și exterioare.
3. Dacă există o problemă serioasă de
siguranță cu alimentarea electrică, opriți
lucrările imediat. Explicați acest motiv
clientului și refuzați instalarea unității până
ce problema legată de siguranță este
rezolvată în mod adecvat.
4. Voltajul electric trebuie e între 90
100% din voltajul nominal. Alimentarea
insucientă cu energie electrică poate
cauza electrocutare sau incendiu.
5. Dacă se conectează electricitatea la
cablarea xă, instalați o protecție la
supratensiune și un comutator principal cu
o capacitate de 1,5 ori mai mare față de
curentul maxim al unității.
6. Dacă conectați alimentarea electrică
la cablarea xă, un comutator sau un
întrerupător de circuit care deconectează
toți polii și care are o separare de contact
de cel puțin 1/8 in (3 mm) trebuie încorporat
în cablarea xă. Tehnicianul calicat trebuie
utilizeze un întrerupător de circuit sau un
comutator aprobat.
7. Conectați aparatul doar la o priză de circuit
individuală. Nu conectați alte aparate la
aceeași priză.
8. Asigurați-vă împământați adecvat
aparatul de aer condiționat.
9. Fiecare cablu trebuie conectat ferm.
Cablurile slabe pot duce la supraîncălzirea
terminalului, ceea ce rezultă în defectarea
produsului și un posibil incendiu.
10. Nu permiteți ca rele sa atingă sau
stea pe conductele de agent frigoric,
compresor sau alte părți care se mișcă ale
unității.
11. Dacă unitatea are un radiator electric
suplimentar, acesta trebuie instalat la cel
puțin 1 m (40 in) departe de materiale
combustibile.
ATENȚIE
Înainte de instalarea unei unități pe perete,
asigurați acel perete este construit
din cărămidă, beton sau din materiale
asemănătoare și rezistente. Peretele
trebuie poată susține cel puțin de
patru ori greutatea unității.
Pagina 24
AVERTIZARE
Page 24
Fig. 4.6
1. Pregătiți cablul pentru conexiune:
UTILIZAȚI CABUL CORECT
Cablu de alimentare intern (dacă este
cazul) H05W-F sau H05V2V2-F
Cablu de alimentare extern: H07RN-F
Cablu de semnal: H07RN-F
Secțiunea transversală minimă a cablurilor
de alimentare și de semnal
America de Nord
a. Utilizând un instrument de de-izolat cabluri,
îndepărtați stratul de cauciuc de la ambele
capete ale cablului de semnal pentru a avea
liberi aproximativ 15cm (6in) de cablu la
interior.
b. Îndepărtați izolația de la capetele cablurilor.
c. Utilizând o mașină de ambutisat cabluri
ambutisați caneluri de tip U la capetele
cablurilor.
10 18
13 16
18 14
25 12
30 10
Amperi aparat (A) AWG
> 3 6
> 6 101
> 10 161
> 16 252
> 25 324
> 32 406
0,75
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
și
și
și
și
și
și
Alte regiuni
Curentul nominal
al aparatului (A)
Zonă nominală
transversală (mm2)
AVERTIZARE
ÎNAINTE DE REALIZAREA ORICĂROR LUCRĂRI
ELECTRICE SAU DE CABLARE, OPRIȚI
ALIMENTAREA ELECTRICĂ A SISTEMULUI.
Diagrama de cablare unitate
exterioară se aă la interiorul
capacului cablurilor din unitatea
exterioară.
Capac
ȚINEȚI CONT DE CABLURILE
ALIMENTATE
În operațiunea de ambutisare, aveți grijă la
diferențierea clară a cablurilor alimentate (cu
inscripția L-live) de celelalte cabluri.
TOATE CABLAJELE TREBUIE REALIZATE
STRICT ÎN CONFORMITATE CU DIAGRAMA DE
CABLARE DIN INTERIORUL PANOULUI UNITĂȚII
INTERIOARE
2. Deșurubați capacul cablurilor electrice și
îndepărtați-l.
3. Deșurubați clema cablului din partea de jos
a terminalului și puneți-o deoparte.
4. Potriviți culorile cu etichetele de pe blocul
terminal, conectați ambutisarea sub formă
de U și înșurubați ferm ecare cablu la
terminalul său corespunzător.
5. După vericare, pentru a asigura
ecare conexiune este sigură, treceți
cablurile printr-o buclă pentru a preveni ca
apa din ploaie pătrundă în terminal.
6. Folosind clema pentru cabluri strângeți
cablul de unitate. Strângeți ferm clema
pentru cabluri.
7. Izolați cablurile neutilizate cu bandă
izolatoare din PVC. Aranjați-le astfel încât
nu atingă nicio parte electrică sau metalică.
8. Puneți la loc capacul relor din lateralul
unității, și înșurubați-l la loc.
Fig. 5.6
Pagina 25
Page 24
Fig. 4.6
Page 25
6
90°
Fig. 5.1
< 15,000 25 (82ft) 10 (33ft)
15,000 < 24,000 30 (98.5ft) 20 (66ft)
24,000 < 36,000 50 (164ft) 25 (82ft)
36,000 60,000 65 (213ft) 30 (98.5ft)
Conectare conductă agent frigoric
R410A Inverter Split Air
Conditioner
Oblic Aspru Ondulat
Instrucțiuni de conectare Conducte
agent frigoric
Etapa 1 : Tăiere țeavă
Atunci când pregătiți conductele de agent
frigoric, aveți deosebită grijă le tăiați și
le expandați adecvat. Acest lucru va asigura
o funcționare ecientă și va reduce la minim
necesitatea unei mentenanțe viitoare. Pentru
unitatile cu freon R32/R290, punctele de
jonctiune a conductelor trebuie situate in
exteriorul incaperii.
1. Măsurați distanța dintre unitatea interioară
și cea exterioară.
Model Capacitate (BTU/h) Lungime max. (m) Înălțime maximă de
cădere (m)
și
și
și
2. Utilizând un clește de tăiat țevi, tăiați
conducta puțin mai lungă decât distanța
măsurată.
3. Asigurați-vă țeava este tăiată la un unghi
perfect de 90o. Consultați Fig. 6.1 pentru
exemple proaste de tăiere.
Notă cu privire la lungimea conductei
Lungimea conductei de agent frigoric va afecta performanța și eciența energetică a aparatului.
Eciența nominală este testată la unitățile cu o lungime a conductei de 5 m (16 in). Pentru a
micsora nivelul zgomotului si virbatiilor, lungimea minima a conductei va de 3 etri. Pentru zone
speciale, tropicale, lungimea maxima a conductei nu trebuie sa depaseasca 10m (32.8ft) si
cantitatea de agent frigoric nu va completata (valabil doar pentru modelele cu freon R290).
Consultați tabelul de mai jos pentru specicații cu privire la lungimea maximă și înălțimea
maximă de cădere a conductei.
Lungimea maximă și înălțimea maximă a conductei de agent frigoric în funcție de
modelul aparatului
Fig. 6.1
Pagina 26
Page 26
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
A (mm)
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
A
Fig. 5.5
NU DEFORMANȚI ȚEAVA
ÎNAINTE DE TĂIERE
Aveți deosebită grijă nu avariați, îndoiți
sau deformați țeava în timpul tăierii.
Acest lucru va reduce drastic eciența de
încălzire a aparatului.
Etapa 2: Îndepărtare bavura
Bavura poate afecta garnitura de etanșare
a conexiunii conductei de agent frigoric.
Aceasta trebuie îndepărtată complet.
1. Țineți țeava în unghi înclinat pentru a
preveni ca bavura pătrundă în conductă.
2. Utilizând un formator sau un instrument de
debavurare, îndepărtați toată bavura din
partea tăiată a conductei.
Etapa 3: Capete conductă expandată
O expandare este esențială pentru a avea o
etanșare bună.
1. După îndepărtarea bavurii din țeava tăiată,
etanșați capetele cu bandă din PVC pentru
a preveni ca materiile străine pătrundă în
conductă.
2. Acoperiți țeava cu material de izolare.
3. Atașați piulițe la ambele capete ale
conductei. Asigurați-vă sunt îndreptate
în direcția corectă, deoarece nu le puteți
instala și nu le puteți schimba direcția după
expandare. Consultați Fig. 6.3.
Conductă
Formator
Punct de bază
Piuliță expandare
Bară de cupru
Conductă
Piuliță
expandare
4. Îndepărtați banda din PVC din capetele
conductei atunci când trebuie realizați
expandarea.
5. Atașați expansorul la capătul conductei.
Capătul conductei trebuie depășească
marginea expansorului conform cu
dimensiunile din tabelul de mai jos.
Diametru exterior
al conductei (mm) Min. Max.
EXTENSIE CONDUCTĂ DUPĂ EXPANDARE
Fig. 6.4
Fig. 6.5
Fig. 6.3
Fig. 6.2
Pagina 27
Page 26
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.4
A (mm)
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 0.7 (0.0275”) 1.3 (0.05”)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.6 (0.063”)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 1.0 (0.04”) 1.8 (0.07”)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.2 (0.086”)
2.0 (0.078”) 2.4 (0.094”)
A
Fig. 5.5
Page 27
≥10cm (4in)
Fig. 5.6
Fig. 5.7
Fig. 5.8
Ø 6.35 (Ø 0.25”) 1,500 (11lbft) 1,600 (11.8lbft)
Ø 9.52 (Ø 0.375”) 2,500 (18.4lbft) 2,600 (19.18lbft)
Ø 12.7 (Ø 0.5”) 3,500 (25.8lb•ft) 3,600 (26.55lb•ft)
Ø 16 (Ø 0.63”)
Ø 19 (Ø 0.75”)
4,500 (33.19lb•ft)
6,500 (47.94lb•ft)
4,700 (34.67lb•ft)
6,700 (49.42lb•ft)
Rază
6. Puneți expansorul pe forma de expandare.
7. Rotiți mânerul expansorului în sensul
acelor de ceasornic până ce conducta este
expandată complet.
8. Îndepărtați expansorul și forma de
expandare, apoi inspectați capătul conductei
pentru crăpături și expandare uniformă.
Etapa 4: Legare conducte
La conectarea conductelor de agent frigoric,
aveți grijă nu folosiți un cuplu de torsiune
excesiv sau deformați conductele în orice
fel. Trebuie conectați mai întâi conducta cu
presiune scăzută apoi conducta cu presiune
crescută.
Diametru exterior al
conductei (mm)
Cuplu de torsiune
(N.cm)
Cuplu de torsiune
suplimentar (N.m)
CERINȚE CUPLU DE TORSIUNE
RAZĂ MINIMĂ DE ÎNDOIRE
Atunci când îndoiți conductele de agent
frigoric, raza minimă de îndoire este de 10
cm. Consultați Fig. 65.6.
Instrucțiuni pentru conectarea
conductei la unitatea interioară
1. Aliniați centrul celor două conducte pe care
urmează le conectați. Consultați Fig.6.7
2. Strângeți piulița pe cât de mult posibil cu
mâna.
3. Utilizând o cheie de buloane apucați piulița
de pe conducta unității.
4. După ce apucați ferm piulița de pe conducta
unității, utilizați o cheie dinamometrică
pentru a strânge piulița conform cu valorile
de torsiune din cerințele cuplului de torsiune
din tabelul de mai jos. Slăbiți ușor piulița de
expandare apoi strângeți-o din nou.
Conductă unitate
interioară Piuliță expandare Conductă
NU UTILIZAȚI UN CUPLU DE TORSIUNE EXAGERAT
Forță excesivă poate rupe piulița sau poate avaria conducta de agent frigoric. Nu trebuie
depășiți cuplul de torsiune conform cerințelor din tabelul de mai sus.
Fig. 6.8
Fig. 6.7
Fig. 6.6
Pagina 28
Page 28
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
Instrucțiuni pentru conectarea
conductei la unitatea exterioară
1. Deșurubați capacul supapei ceva din
lateralul unității exterioare (consultați Fig.
6.9).
2. Îndepărtați capacul de protecție de la
capătul supapelor.
3. Aliniați conducta lărgită cu ecare supapă
și strângeți piulița de expansiune pe cât de
strâns posibil cu mâna
4. Utilizând o cheie de buloane, apucați corpul
supapei. Nu apucați piulița ce detașează
supapa de service (consultați Fig. 6.10). 5. Atunci când apucați ferm corpul supapei,
folosiți o cheie dinamometrică pentru a
strânge piulița de expansiune conform
valorilor corecte de torsiune.
6. Slăbiți ușor piulița de expansiune apoi
strângeți-o din nou.
7. Repetați etapele de la 3 până la 6 pentru
conductele rămase.
UTILIZAȚI O CHEIE DE BULOANE
PENTRU A ȚINE DE CORPUL
SUPAPEI
Cuplul de torsiune din strângerea piuliței de
expansiune poate desprindă o altă parte
a supapei.
Capac supapă
Fig. 6.10
Fig. 6.9
Pagina 29
Page 28
Fig. 5.9
Fig. 5.10
Page 29
.7
-76cmHg
MC MC
Fig. 6.1
Evacuare aer
Pregătire și măsuri de siguranță
Aerul și materiile străine din circuitul agentului
frigoric pot duce la creșteri anormale de
presiune, ce pot avaria aparatul de aer
condiționat, pot să-i reducă eciența și pot
cauza vătămare. Utilizați o pompă de vid și o
supapă colectoare pentru a evacua circuitul
agentului frigoric, îndepărtând gazele ce nu
provoacă condens și umezeala din sistem.
Evacuarea trebuie realizată la instalarea
inițială și atunci când unitatea este mutată.
ÎNAINTE DE A REALIZA EVACUAREA
o Vericați pentru a asigura ambele
conducte cu presiune ridicată și presiune
scăzută dintre unitatea interioară și unitatea
exterioară sunt conectate adecvat, conform
cu capitolul conectarea conductei de agent
frigoric din acest manual.
o Vericați pentru a asigura toate
cablurile sunt conectate adecvat.
Instrucțiuni evacuare
Înainte de utilizarea supapei colectoare și a
pompei de vid, citiți manualul lor de utilizare
pentru a familiariza cu modul de utilizare
adecvată a acestora.
1. Conectați furtunul de încărcare la supapa
colectoare din portul de service al supapei
de presiune scăzută a unității exterioare.
2. Conectați un alt furtun de încărcare din
supapa colectoare la pompa de vid.
3. Deschideți partea de presiune scăzută
a supapei colectoare. Păstrați partea de
presiune crescută închisă.
4. Porniți pompa de vid pentru a evacua
sistemul.
5. Lăsați pompa acționeze timp de cel puțin
15 minute sau până ce contorul integral
indică - 70 6 cm Hg (-105Pa).
Supapă colectoare
Supapă presiune
Supapă presiune ridicată
Furtun de umplere
Pompă de vid
Supapă presiune scăzută
Supapă îmbinată
Supapă presiune
scăzută
Furtun de presiune/
furtun de umplere
Fig. 7.1
Pagina 30
Page 30
Fig. 6.2
N/A
6. Închideți partea de presiune joasă de pe
supapa colectoare apoi opriți pompa de vid.
7. Așteptați 5 minute, apoi vericați dacă există
schimbări în presiunea sistemului.
8. Dacă există schimbări în presiunea
sistemului, consultați secțiunea Vericarea
Scurgerilor de Gaze pentru informații cu
privire la modul de vericare a scurgerilor.
Dacă nu există schimbări în presiunea
sistemului, deșurubați capacul supapei
incluse (supapei de presiune crescută).
9. Introduceți o cheie hexagonala în supapa
inclusă(supapa de presiune crescută) și
deschideți supapa prin rotirea cheii cu 1/4
rotire în sensul invers acelor de ceasornic.
Ascultați ieșirea gazului din sistem, apoi
închideți supapa după 5 secunde.
10. Monitorizați indicatorul de presiune timp
de un minut pentru a asigura nu există
schimbări ale presiunii. Indicatorul de presiune
trebuie arate opresiune ușor mai mare
decât presiunea atmosferică.
11. Îndepărtați furtunul de încărcare de la portul
de service.
Notă cu privire la adăugarea de agent frigoric
Unele sisteme necesită încărcare suplimentară în funcție de lungimea conductelor. Lungimea standard
a conductelor variază conform cu reglementările locale. De exemplu, în America de Nord, lungimea
standard a conductei este de 7,5 m (25 in). În alte zone, mărimea standard a conductei este de 5 m (16 in).
Freonul va incarcat prin supapa de presiune scazuta, localizata in portul de serviciu al unitatii exteriorare.
Agentul frigoric suplimentar ce trebuie încărcat poate calculat utilizând următoarea formulă:
12. Utilizați o cheie hexagonala, deschideți atât
supapa de presiune crescută cât și supapa de
presiune scăzută.
13. Strângeți capacele supapelor pe toate cele 3
supape (portul de service, supapa de presiune
scăzută, supapa de presiune crescută) cu
mâna. Apoi puteți le strângeți utilizând o
cheie dinamometrică dacă este nevoie.
DESCHIDEȚI ÎNCET TIJELE SUPAPEI
LUNGIME CONDUCTĂ AGENT FRIGORIFIC SUPLIMENTAR
Atunci când deschideți tijele supapei, rotiți
cheia hexagonala până ce atinge opritorul.
Nu încercați forțat supapa se deschidă
mai mult de atât.
Piuliță expandare
Corp supapă Tijă supapă
Capac
Lungime
conductă de
corecție (m)
Metoda de
purjare aer Agent frigoric suplimentar
Lungime standard
conductă
> Lungime
standard
conductă
Pompă
de vid
Partea lichidă: Ø 6.35 0.25”)
R32:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 12g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.13oZ/ft
R290:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 10g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.10oZ/ft
R410A:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 15g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.16oZ/ft
Partea lichidă: Ø 9.52 0.375”)
R32:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 24g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.26oZ/ft
R290:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 18g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.19oZ/ft
R410A:
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 30g/m
(Lungime conductă – lungime standard) x 0.32oZ/ft
Pompă
de vid
Cantitatea de freon R290 care trebuie incarcata nu va depasi urmatoarele valori :
387g(<9000 Btu/h), 447g (9-12000Btu/h), 547g (>12-18000Btu/h), 632g(>18-24000Btu/h).
ATENȚIE NU amestecați tipul de agent frigoric.
Fig. 7.2
Pagina 31
Page 30
Fig. 6.2
N/A
Page 31
.8
Vericări electrice și de scurgere gaze
Vericări electrice de siguranță
După instalare, conrmați toate cablaje
electrice sunt instalate în conformitate cu
reglementările locale și naționale și respectând
manualul de instalare.
ÎNAINTE DE TESTAREA FUNCȚIONĂRII
Vericați lucrările de împământare
Măsurați rezistența la împământare prin
detectarea vizuală și prin testarea rezistenței
de împământare. Rezistența de împământare
trebuie e mai mică decât 4.
Notă: Acest lucru poate nu e necesar
pentru anumite locații din SUA.
ÎN TIMPUL TESTĂRII DE FUNCȚIONARE
Vericați pierderile electrice
În timpul testării funcționării, utilizați o sondă de
curent electric și un multimetru pentru a realiza
un test de pierderi electrice elaborat.
Dacă se detectează pierderi electrice, opriți
imediat aparatul și apelați la un electrician
autorizat pentru a găsi și a rezolva cauza
pierderilor.
Notă: Acest lucru poate nu e cerut în unele
locații din SUA.
AVERTIZARE RISC DE
ELECTROCUTARE
TOATE CABLURILE TREBUIE FIE ÎN
CONFORMITATE CU CODURILE ELECTRICE
LOCALE ȘI NAȚIONALE ȘI TREBUIE INSTALATE
DE CĂTRE UN ELECTRICIAN AUTORIZAT.
VERIFICĂRI SCURGERI DE GAZE
Există două metode diferite pentru a verica
scurgerile de gaze.
Metoda soluției de apă cu săpun
Utilizând o perie moale, aplicați o soluție de apă
cu săpun sau detergent lichid la toate punctele
de legătură ale conductelor din unitatea
interioară și cea exterioară. Prezența bulelor de
aer indică o scurgere.
Metoda detectorului de scurgeri
Dacă utilizați un detector de scurgeri, rugăm
consultați manualul de utilizare al dispozitivului
pentru instrucțiuni de utilizare adecvate.
DUPĂ REALIZAREA VERIFICĂRII DE
SCURGERI DE GAZE
După conrmarea toate punctele de
conexiune ale conductelor nu curg, înlocuiți
capacul supapei de la unitatea exterioară
Pagina 32
Page 32
9
TESTARE FUNCȚIONARE
Înainte de testarea funcționării
Realizați testarea de funcționare numai după
ce ați îndeplinit următoarele etape:
Vericările de siguranță electrică
conrmați ca sistemul electric al unității este
sigur și funcționează adecvat
Vericări ale scurgerilor de gaze
vericați toate piulițele de expansiune ale
conexiunilor și conrmați sistemul nu
curge.
Conrmați sub apele de gaze și
deschide (presiune crescută și scăzută)
sunt deschise la maxim
Instrucțiuni cu privire la testarea
funcționării
Trebuie realizați testarea funcționării timp
de cel puțin 30 de minute.
1. Conectați alimentarea electrică la aparat.
2. Apăsați butonul PORNIRE / OPRIRE (ON/
OFF) de pe telecomandă pentru a porni
aparatul.
3. Apăsați butonul MODUL (MODE) pentru a
alege una din următoarele funcții, câte una
pe rând:
RĂCIRE (COOL) alegeți cea mai mică
temperatură posibilă
ÎNCĂLZIRE (HEAT) alegeți cea mai mare
temperatură posibilă
4. Lăsați ecare funcție funcționeze
aproximativ 5 minute și realizați următoarele
vericări:
Listă de vericări
ce trebuie efectuate TRECUTE/ EȘUATE
Nu există pierderi electrice
Aparatul este adecvat împământat
Toate terminalele electrice sunt
acoperite adecvat
Unitățile interioare și exterioare
sunt bine instalate
Toate punctele de legătură ale
conductelor nu curg
Apa se scurge în mod adecvat
prin furtunul de scurgere
Toate conductele sunt
izolate în mod adecvat
Aparatul realizează funcțiile
de răcire în mod adecvat
Aparatul realizează funcțiile
de încălzire în mod adecvat
Fantele unității interioare
se rotesc în mod adecvat
Unitatea interioară răspunde
la comenzile telecomenzii
Exterior (2) Interior (2)
Pagina 33
Page 32
9
VERIFICAȚI DE DOUĂ ORI
CONEXIUNILE CONDUCTELOR
În timpul funcționării, presiunea circuitului
agentului frigoric va crește. Acest lucru
poate însemna există scurgeri ce nu au
fost vizibile în timpul testelor inițiale pentru
scurgeri. Nu grăbiți în timpul testării
funcționării și vericați de două ori ca toate
punctele de conexiune ale conductelor
de agent frigoric nu prezinte scurgeri.
Consultați secțiunea Vericarea Scurgerilor
de Gaze pentru instrucțiuni.
5. După nalizarea cu succes a testării
funcționării și după ce conrmați toate
punctele de vericare de pe lista de
vericare au fost trecute, faceți următoarele:
a. Utilizând telecomanda, setați aparatul pe
temperatura normală de funcționare.
b. Utilizând bandă izolatoare, izolați
conexiunile conductei de agent frigoric
din interior ce pot rămâne descoperite în
timpul procesului de instalare al unității
interioare
DACĂ TEMPERATURA AMBIENTALĂ ESTE
SUB 17°C (63°F)
Nu puteți utiliza telecomanda pentru a
porni funcția RĂCIRE(COOL) atunci când
temperatura ambientală este sub 17 °C. În
acest caz, puteți utiliza butonul de control
manual pentru a testa funcția de răcire.
1. Ridicati panoul frontal al unitatii interioare
pana cand veti auzi un “clic”
2. Butonul pentru control manual este
localizat in partea dreapta a panoului,
apasati butonul de 2 ori pentru a activa
modul COOL vezi FIG 9.1
3. Continuati cu testarea, in mod normal.
Buton control manual
Page 33
Fig. 9.1
Pagina 34
Page 34
.10
DISPOZIȚII EUROPENE
PENTRU ELIMINARE
Acest aparat conține agent frigoric și alte materiale periculoase cu potențial vătămător. Atunci
când eliminați acest aparat, legea cere o colectare specială ți tratament special. Nu aruncați
acest produs ca și gunoi menajer sau gunoi municipal nesortat.
Atunci când eliminați acest aparat, aveți următoarele opțiuni:
Eliminați aparatul în cadrul instituției specializate de colectare a deșeurilor electronice din
municipiu.
La achiziționarea unui nou produs, vânzătorul va lua la schimb vechiul produs fără costuri
suplimentare.
Producătorul va lua înapoi vechiul aparat gratuit.
Vindeți aparatul către dealeri de er vechi autorizați.
Noticare specială
Eliminarea produsului în păduri sau pe diverse terenuri din natură pune în pericol sănătatea
dvs. și dăunează mediului înconjurător. Substanțe periculoase se pot scurge în pânza freatică
și reușesc pătrundă în lanțul alimentar.
Page 35
11
Pagina 35
Page 34
.10
Page 35
11
Informare cu privire la service.
(Valabil doar pentru unitatile care utilizeaza freon R32/R290)
1. Vericati zona
Inainte de a incepe lucrari la sistemele ce contin agenti frigorici inamabili, efectuati vericari
ale mediului inconjurator pentru a elimina posibilitatea aparitiei unei scantei.
2. Procedura
Lucrarile vor facute intr-un mediu controlat, pentru a minimiza riscul aprinderii gazelor sau
vaporilor inamabili.
3. Zona de lucru
Toti participantii la lucrare si ceilalti angajati care sunt prezenti in zona lucrarii, vor informati
despre natura reparatiilor. Zona in care se fac lucrarile va delimitata. Asigurati-va ca mediul de
lucru din acea incapere va permite lucrul cu materiale inamabile.
4. Vericati daca exista scurgeri de freon
Vericati cu un detector de freon, daca exista gaz in incapere. Folositi echipamentul de
detectare a scurgerilor inainte de a incepe lucrarea. Asigurati-va ca echipamentul de detectare a
scurgerilor este perfect functional (nu emite scantei, este sigilat, etc.)
5. Disponibilitatea unui extinctor
Asigurati disponibilitataea unui extinctor cu pudra uscata sau CO2 in incaperea unde se executa
lucrarile.
6. Eliminati sursele de scanteie.
In timpul lucrarilor la traseele frigorice, ce presupun expunerea conductelor, este interzisa
folosirea oricarui produs ce poate genera scanteie. Toate sursele de scanteie, incluzand fumatul,
vor mentinute departe de locul lucrarii. Semnalizati locul lucrarii cu panouri prin care se
interzice fumatul: “FUMATUL INTERZIS”
7. Aerisiti incaperea
Inainte de a incepe, asigurati-va ca incaperea in care se vor face lucrarile, este bine ventilata.
Mentineti ventilatia incaperii pe toata durata lucrarilor. Acest lucru va ajuta la eliminarea freonului
in caz de scurgeri.
8. Vericari ale traseului frigoric.
Asigurati-va ca, in cazul in care schimbati piese componente, acestea corespund specicatiilor
impuse. Informatiile despre service si instructiunile producatorului vor respectate tot timpul.
Daca aveti indoieli cu privire la lucrare, contactati departamentul de service al producatorului.
Urmatoarele vericari sunt necesare pentru toate instalatiile care utilizeaza agenti frigorici
inamabili:
l Cantitatea de freon incarcata, corespunde cu dimensiunea incaperii in care este instalat
aparatul.
Pagina 36
Page 36
l Prizele de ventilare/evacuare a aerului nu sunt obstructionate.
l Daca folositi un un traseu frigoric, toate celelalte circuite si trasee vor vericate pentru a
determina prezenta freonului. Informatiile inscrise pe echipament vor vizibile si lizibile.
l Marcajele si semnele care nu pot citite, vor corectate.
l Vericati daca traseul frigoric si celelalte componente sunt instalate intr-o locatie in care este
putin probabil ca acestea sa intre in contact cu substante corozive. Se face exceptie de la
aceasta regula daca acele componente sunt construite din materiale rezistente la substante
corozive.
9. Vericari ale dispozitivelor electrice.
Reparatiile si lucrarile de mentenanta executate asupra componentelor electrice vor include
vericari intiale cu privire la siguranta si inspectia componentelor. In cazul existentei unei
situatii care poate compromite siguranta, nici un circuit electric nu va conectat la reteaua
electrica pana ce defectul nu este remediat. Daca remedierea nu poate facuta imediat dar
totusi continuarea lucrarii este necesara, folositi o alta metoda, temporara, potrivita situatiei.
Transmiteti informatia proprietarului pentru ca toate partile sa e in cunostiinta de cauza.
Vericarile initiale includ:
l Descarcarea capacitorilor: aceasta lucrare se va face cu evitarea oricarei situati care poate
produce o scanteie.
l Nici un component electric nu va alimentat si expus in timpul lucrarilor de incarcare,
recuperare sau eliminare a agentului frigoric.
l Impamantarea este legata.
10. Reparatii asupra componentelor sigilate
10.1 In cazul lucrarilor asupra componentelor sigilate, aparatul va oprit si scos din priza,
inainte de inceperea lucrarilor sau inlaturarea oricarui capac. In cazul in care este neaparat
necesara conectarea componentelor, instalati un echipament de detectare a scurgerilor.
10.2 Lucrati cu atentie, pentru a evita deteriorarea carcaselor componentelor altfel nivelul de
protectie poate scadea. De atentie sporita este nevoie si atunci cand lucrati la instalatia
electrica (deteriorarea cablurilor, un numar prea mare de conexiuni, conexiunile terminale
nu resepecta paraetrii, etc.)
l Asigurati-va ca aparatul este montat corect.
l Vericati materialele cu ajutorul carora ati sigilat traseele, pentru a va asigura ca nu sunt
degradate. Piesele de schimb vor corespunde specicatiilor producatorului.
NOTA: Ecienta in detectarea scurgerilor poate scadea in cazul utilizarii siliconului pentru
sigilare. Componentele sigure, nu trebuie izolate inainte de a incepe lucrarea asupra lor.
11. Repararea componentelor sigure.
Nu depasiti limitele superioare ale tensiunii si intensitatii, permise de catre aparat.
Componentele sigure ale aparatului, sunt singurele componente pe care se poate lucra in timp
ce sunt alimentate cu energie electrica, in prezenta materialelor inamabile.
In caz de inlocuire a unei piese, aceasta va inlocuita doar cu o piesa originala, specicata
de catre producator. Folosirea altor piese decat cele recomandata de producator, pot produce
scantei la momentul unei scurgeri de freon.
Pagina 37
Page 37
12. Cablarea
Vericati cablarea pentru a va asigura ca nu este deteriorata si ca nu exista margini ascutite in
apropiere. Cand vericati, luati in considerare si “imbatranirea cablurilor” sau vibratia continua
provocata de compresor si ventilatoare.
13. Detectia agentilor frigorici inamabili.
Nu folositi sub nici o forma surse de scantei, atunci cand vericati scurgerile de freon. De
asemnea, nu trebuie folosit nici un aparat cu ama deschisa in acea incapere.
14. Metode de detectare a scurgerilor.
Metodele descrise mai jos sunt acceptate pentru sistemele ce contin agenti frigorici inamabili.
Detectia electronica a scurgerilor poate folosita pentru a detecta scurgerile de freon inamabil
dar ecienta poate scazuta si recalibrarea este recomandata (recalibrarea va facuta intr-o
incapere in care nu exista agenti frigorici). Asigurati-va ca detectorul in sine nu este o sursa
de scanteie si ca este potrivit pentru detectia agentilor frigorici inamabili. Echipamentului ii
va setat un procentaj minim de detectie si va calibtrat in functie de tipul agentului frigorici si
concentratia de gaz (maxim 25%).
Lichidele pentru detectie pot folosite cu toate tipurile de agenti frigorici. Nu folositi detergenti
ce contin clor deoarece acesta ar putea reactiona impreuna cu freonul si pot coroda conductele
de cupru.
Daca suspectati przenta unei scurgeri, eliminati toate acarile deschise. Daca descoperiti o
sura ce necesita lipire, recuperati tot freonul din sistem. Pentru purjarea sistemului, folositi azot
fara oxygen (OFN), pe toata durata procesului de lipire.
15. Inlaturarea si evacuarea.
Cand accesati un traseu frigoric, se recomanda respectarea instructiunillor de mai jos:
l eliminati agentul frigoric
l purjati intreg sistem cu un gaz inert.
l Eliminati aerul
l Repetati procesul de purjare.
l Deschideti circuitul prin taiere.
Freonul va recuperat in containere corespunzatoare. Sistemul va purjat cu OFN pentru
siguranta aparatului. In functie de necesitati, puteti repeta procesul.
Nu folositi aer comprimat sau oxigen pentru purjare.
Eliminarea freonului se face prin pomparea de OFN in sistem pana cand se atinge presiunea
sistemului, apoi evacand intregul sistem si folosind pompa de vid. Repetati acest proces pana
cand eliminati intreaga cantitate de freon.
La ultima incarcare cu OFN, sistemul trebuie ventilat si depresurizat pana la presiunea
normala atmosferica. Aceasta operatiune este vitala daca urmeaza sa faceti lucrari de lipire a
conductelor.
Asigurati-va ca evacuarea pompei de facuum nu se aa in apropierea unei surse de scanteie.
Pagina 38
Page 38
16. Procedura de incarcare.
Pe langa procedura normala de incarcare cu agent frigoric, respectati urmatoarele instructiuni:
l Asigurati-va ca agentul rgoric nu va contaminat cu alte substante, atunci cand folositi
echipamentul de incarcare. Furtunul sau conductele de alimentare trebuie sa e cat mai
scurte.
l Recipientele vor mentinute in pozitie verticala.
l Asigurati-va ca traseul frigoric este impamantat.
l Dupa incarcare, etichetati sistemul.
l Nu incarcati peste limita acceptata.
l Inainte de incarcare, testati sistemul cu OFN, pentru a descoperii eventualele scurgeri.
17. Scoaterea din utilizare a aparatului.
Inainte de a incepe aceasta lucrare, este esential ca tehnicianul sa se familiarizeze cu aparatul.
Este recomandat sa recuperati intreaga cantitate de agent frigoric. Inainte de a incepe lucrarea,
prelevati esantioane din ulei si din agentul frigoric.
nainte de a incepe recoltarea agentului frigoric, asigurati-va ca este disponibila alimentarea cu
energie electrica.
a) Familiarizati-va cu aparatul si modul de functionare.
b) izolati electric sistemul
c) Inainte de a incepe procedura faceti urmatoarele vericari :
l Aveti disponibil intregul echipament necesar.
l Aveti disponibil intregul echipament de protectie necesar si ca este folosit corect.
l Procesul de recuperare a freonului este supravegheat in permanenta de catre personal
calicat.
l Echipamentul pentru recuperare si cilindrii de depozitare sunt conforme cu standardele.
d) Pompati freonul, daca este posibil.
e) Daca vidarea nu este posibila, folositi colectorul pentru a recupera agentul frigoric din
intreaga instalatie.
f) Asigurati-va ca cilindrii de depozitare se aa pe cantar inainte de recuperare.
g) Operati echipamentul pentru recuperare respectand instructiunile producatorului.
h) Nu supraincarcati cilindrii de depozitare. (volumul lichid nu trebuie sa depaseasca 80%).
i) Nu depasiti limita superioara a presiunii in cilindru.
j) Cand recipientele au fost umplute si lucrarea a fost terminata, inlaturati-le imediat din incapere
si inchideti corect toate supapele.
k) Nu utilizati agentul frigoric recuperat in alta instalatie decat dupa ce acesta a fost vericat si
puricat.
18. Etichetarea.
O data ce ati scos din functie aparatul, asigurati-va ca acesta este etichetat corespunzator.
Etichetele trebuie sa contina tipul de agent frigoric continut.
19. Recuperarea.
l Atunci cand eliminati freonul dintr-un sistem, pentru service sau scoaterea din folosire, este
recomandat sa respectati normele.
l Cand transferati freonul in recipiente, asigurati-va ca doar cilindrele sunt cele potrivite.
Pagina 39
Page 38
Page 39
Asigurati-va ca aveti disponibile suciente recipiente pentru intreaga cantitate de freon.
Cilindrii vor echipati cu supape de presiune si supape de inchidere.
l Recipientele vor goale si racite inainte de recuperare.
l Echipamentul folosit pentru recuperare este functional, are instructiuni disponibile si este
potrivit pentru respectiva lucrare. De asemenea, trebuie sa veti disponibil un cantar calibrat si
functional.
l Furtunul pentru transfer trebuie sa e in stare perfecta, cu protectie la scurgere. Inainte de
inceperea recuperarii, asigurati-va ca toate componentele electrice sunt izolate pentru a
preveni aparitia scanteilor in cazul unei scurgeri de freno.
l Freonul recuperat trebuie returnat distribuitorului in recipientele corespunzatoare, etichetate
corect. Nu amestecati agentii frigorici!
l In cazul in care trebuie sa inlaturati compresorul sau uleiul pentru compresor, asigurati-va
ca ati eliminat intreaga cantitate de freon inainte de returnarea catre producator. Pentru a
accelera procesul, puteti folosi DOAR incalzirea electrica.
20. Transportul, etichetarea si depozitarea aparatelor.
1. Transportul echipamentelor care contin materiale inamabile trebuie sa respecte normele si
legile in vigoare.
2. Semnalizarea echipamentelor se va face prin marcaje si etichete ce respecta normele si legile
in vigoare.
3. Eliminarea deseurilor se va face respectand legile in vigoare.
4. Depozitarea echipamentelor va respecta instructiunile producatorului.
5. Depozitarea produselor in ambalaj original (nevandute), se va face astfel incat, orice
deteriorare mecanica nu va produce scurgeri de freon.
Numarul maxim de unitati depozitate va respecta normele locale.
Toate imaginile din acest manual, au scop pur informativ. Forma reala a produsului pe care
l-ati cumparat poate usor diferita insa functiile si operatiile sunt aceleasi.
Compania nu isi asuma nici o responsabilitate pentru greselile de tipar. Aspectul zic si
specicatiile tehnice se pot schimba fara o noticare prealabila datorita imbunatatirii
continue a echipamentelor noastre.
Pentru mai multe detalii, va rugam sa contactati producatorul la numarul
de telefon: +30 211 300 3300, sau vanzatorul echipamentului. Toate actualizarile acestui
manual vor disponibile pe website-ul nostru si va recomandam sa vericati intotdeauna
pentru aparitia unei noi versiuni.
Scanati codul QR pentru a descarca ultima versiune a manualului.
www.inventoraerconditionat.ro/biblioteca-media
NOTES
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
WALL MOUNTED UNIT
Please check the applicable models, F-GAS and manufacturer information
from the “Owner’s Manual - Product Fiche” in the packaging of the outdoor unit. (European Union products only).
112


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 11.05 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C

Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C Additional guide - English - 36 pages

Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C Additional guide - English - 48 pages

Inventor PR1VO32 Premium C User Manual - English - 56 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info